2005 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety.................................................................................................................ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance.....................................................................................................................4
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................7
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................57
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Features ............................................................................................................................................161
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................247
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................261
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................289
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................335
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................363
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................377
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................381
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
This owner’s manual should be
considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications
included in this publication were in
effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice
and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual covers all
models of the Acura RL. You may
find descriptions of equipment and
features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Congratulations on your selection of the 2005 Acura RL. We are certain you
will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in the
world.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains
or emits chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
Main Menu
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
These signal words mean:
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Instructions
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Main Menu
Main Menu
＊
＊
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR
LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKETS
HOOD RELEASE LEVER
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.124)
(P.116)
(P.145)
(P.117)
(P.60)
AIRBAGS
MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON
(P.122)
(P.11, 24)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.251)
TRUNK RELEASE
BUTTON
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
BUTTON
POWER REAR
(P.217)
(P.204)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.148)
SUNSHADE BUTTON(P.158)
(P.120)
(P.265)
(P.156)
(P.171)
(P.162)
TILT BUTTON
HomeLink BUTTONS
OnStar BUTTONS
(P.249)
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
1:
CEILING CONSOLE
INTERFACE DIAL
(P.163, 171, 208)
1
Main Menu
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
2:
3:
Canadian models only
Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
5
MIRROR CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT
PANEL BRIGHTNESS
STEERING WHEEL
AUDIO CONTROLS
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
(P.104)
(P.109)
(P.102)
HANDSFREELINK
BUTTONS
HORN
(P.282)
(P.231)
(P.108)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNAL/FOG
LIGHTS
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH
PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P.267)
(P.111)
(P.198)
(P.123)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON
(P.123)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
WIPER/WASHER
MULTI INFORMATION BUTTONS (P.69)
(P.109)
(P.33)
(P.201)
(P.143)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
(P.142) /
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
SEAT HEATER AND
SEAT VENTILATION
BUTTONS
(P.110) /
TM
3
2
Main Menu
Main Menu
6
Main Menu
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 14
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 17
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.........Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
.......Additional Safety Precautions . 20
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 21
..Seat Belt System Components . 21
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 22
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 24
......Airbag System Components . 24
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 27
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 32
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 33
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 33
.............................Airbag Service . 34
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 36
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 36
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 37
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 37
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 39
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 39
...Additional Safety Precautions . 40
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 41
.......................Protecting Infants . 41
.........Protecting Small Children . 42
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 43
....................Installing a Child Seat . 44
...............................With LATCH . 45
..........................With a Seat Belt . 47
..............................With a Tether . 49
...........Protecting Larger Children . 50
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 50
..................Using a Booster Seat . 51
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 52
...Additional Safety Precautions . 53
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
...................................Safety Labels . 55
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
Main Menu
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
canusethebeltproperlywithouta
booster (see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
17
50 53
298
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and Drive
8
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
(1)
(2)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(7)
(11)
(9)
(6)
(8)
(3)
(6)
(10)
(8)
(9)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
10
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision. For more
information, see page .
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the torso of the driver or
a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact. For
more information, see page .
Your vehicle also has side curtain
airbags to help protect the heads of
the driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions during a moderate to
severe side impact. For more
information, see page .27
30
32
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags can pose hazards.
What you should do:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags off er no protection in rear
impacts, or minor f rontal or side
collisions.
12
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Your vehicle has a door monitor
indicator on the multi-information
display to indicate when a specific
door or the trunk is not tightly closed.
You will see the appropriate light/
lights and the message for each
condition.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult
passengers, and teenage children
who are large enough and mature
enough to drive or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are
closed and locked.
When one or more doors are not
tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
indicator will stay on.
When the trunk is not tightly closed,
the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator will
stay on.
36 40
CONTINUED
Introduction
Close and Lock the Doors1.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
When both the trunk and one or
more doors are not tightly closed,
the ‘‘DOOR & TRUNK OPEN’’
indicator will stay on.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
130
Adjust the Front Seats2.
Protecting Adults and Teens
14
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel in and out (see page
). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
119
111
CONTINUED
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
119
120
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
CONTINUED
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
21
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens
18
RELEASE
BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
If a side airbag
or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
cupholderorotherhardobject
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a f ront door.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Adults and Teens
20
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you to fasten your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition to ON (II)
before fastening your seat belt, the
beeper will sound and the indicator
will flash. If you do not fasten your
seat belt before the beeper stops, the
indicator will stop flashing but
remain on.
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. You will
also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
17
77
CONTINUED
Seat Belt System Components
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions,
andtheyshouldactivateinany
collision severe enough to cause
front-airbag inflation.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
as far as needed.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
manner.
47
do not deploy
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
22
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. Any belt that
is not in good condition or working
properly will not provide good
protection and should be replaced as
soon as possible.
Acura provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your
booklet for details.
321
Acura Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(6)
(4)
(8)
(10)
(5)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your airbag system includes:
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
32
30
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
(12)
(13)
(3)
(14)
(12)
(12) Side Impact Sensor (Second)
(13) Rear Safing Sensor
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and automatically turn
the airbag off (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. These automatically turn off
the passenger’s front airbag if
they detect an infant or small child
maybeintheseat(seepage ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is in ON (II).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
22
29
29
29
33
33
32
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).29
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
or not the occupant is wearing a seat
belt.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
It the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
28
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. If the sensors detect
an infant or small child may be in the
seat, the system will automatically
turn the passenger’s front airbag off.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
When the airbag is turned off, an
indicator in the center of the
dashboard will come on indicating
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
).
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the
passenger’s seat.
If there is no passenger in the front
seat, the airbag will be off. However,
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator
will not come on.
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
33
322
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the f ront passenger’s seat.
30
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in front, this system
is designed to shut off the side
airbag if a child leans into the side
airbag’s path.
33
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition to
ON (II).
When you turn the ignition to ON
(II), this indicator will come on
briefly then go out. This tells you the
system is working properly.
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
32
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect an infant or small child may
be in the front passenger’s seat. It
does there is a problem
with the airbag.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
). This indicator alerts
you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
When you turn the ignition to ON
(II), the indicator should come on
briefly and go out (see page ). If it
does not come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, you will also see a
‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. Have the system
checked (see page ).
76
61
77
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
not
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
Canada
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors to
make sure they are operating
properly.
If no one is riding in the front seat,
the airbag will be automatically shut
off. However, the indicator will not
come on.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. If a
front airbag inflates, the seat belt
tensioners must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.If the indicator comes on with no
passenger in the front, or with an
adult in the seat, there may be a
problem with the advanced airbag
system. Have the vehicle checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
The Passenger Airbag Off indicator
may also come on and off repeatedly
if total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold.
If this happens, have the passenger
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
Airbag Service
34
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not remove or modif y a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
49
50 53
41
properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
36
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system, which
can automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), please follow the
guidelines below.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. For more information, see page
.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
50
29
CONTINUED
Protecting Children General Guidelines
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
38
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual
contact, we strongly recommend
that another adult ride with the
child in a back seat. The back seat
is far safer for a child than the
front.
50
17
119
18
Protecting Children General Guidelines
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
This can prevent children
from accidentally falling out (see
page ).
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition can accidentally set the
vehicle in motion, possibly injuring
themselves or others.
Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature(seepage ).
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
118
118
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
40
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking the
seat-back in the desired position.
Or, it can interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Do not put a rear-f acing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the f ront
seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child who is at least 1 year old, and
who fits within the child seat maker’s
weight and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In any situation, we strongly
recommend that you install the child
seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags,
which can automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
29
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
42
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page ).
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) system.
1.
2.
45
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to f it the child.
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position, or positions,
where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
44
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the outer
rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
Push the rear head restraint tilt
button on the ceiling console to
pivot the head restraints down.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
LOWER
ANCHORS
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
After properly securing the child
seat with the lap/shoulder belt
(see page ), route the tether
strap over the head restraint.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
47
Installing a Child Seat
46
RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. 2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
5.4.
Installing a Child Seat
48
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After properly securing the child
seat with the lap/shoulder belt
(see page ), pivot the head
restraint down (see page ) and
route the tether strap over the
head restraint.
Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
1.
2.
3.
47
120
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using the Tether Anchor
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
COVER
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
50
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster meets federal
safety standards (see page ) and
that you follow the booster seat
maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far to the rear as possible,
and be sure the child is wearing the
seat belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Some states also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
3.
4.
5.
43
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see page ). If the seat
belt does not fit properly, with or
without the child sitting on a booster
seat, the child should not sit in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
50
Protecting Larger Children
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
52
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows and
set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
54
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
HOOD
DASHBOARD
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models Canadian models
Safety Labels
56
SUN VISOR
DOORJAMBS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 58
............................Instrument Panel . 59
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60
.............................................Gauges . 68
...................Temperature Gauge . 68
..................................Fuel Gauge . 68
.............Multi-Information Display . 69
Controls Near the Steering
.........................................Wheel . 101
Windshield Wipers and
.....................................Washers . 102
...................................Turn Signal . 104
....................................Headlights . 104
....................................Fog Lights . 106
Adaptive Front Lighting System
.........................................(AFS) . 107
...............Hazard Warning Button . 109
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 109
...............Rear Window Defogger . 110
......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 111
.............................Keys and Locks . 113
......................Immobilizer System . 114
..............................Ignition Switch . 115
....................................Door Locks . 116
..............................................Trunk . 117
......Emergency Trunk Opener . 118
................Childproof Door Locks . 118
...............................................Seats . 119
...........................................Mirrors . 122
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 124
................Keyless Access System . 127
..................................Seat Heaters . 142
Seat Heaters and Seat
.................................Ventilation . 143
............................Power Windows . 145
.......................................Moonroof . 147
...............................Parking Brake . 151
.........Interior Convenience Items . 152
..................................Glove Box . 153
.....................Beverage Holders . 154
.............Console Compartment . 155
..................................Sun Visors . 156
........Accessory Power Sockets . 156
...........................Rear Ashtrays . 157
..................Front Door Pockets . 157
..............Power Rear Sunshade . 158
..............Integrated Sunshades . 159
...............................Interior Lights . 160
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
57
Main Menu
Main Menu
＊
＊
Control Locations
58
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
GAUGES
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
HOOD RELEASE LEVER
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
BUTTON
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
CEILING CONSOLE
HomeLink BUTTONS
MOONROOF SWITCH
POWER REAR
TILT BUTTON
SUNSHADE BUTTON
OnStar BUTTONS
(P.120)
(P.204)
(P.217)
(P.148)
(P.158)
MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON
(P.60)
(P.68)
(P.124)
(P.116)
(P.145)
(P.122)
(P.162)
(P.171)
(P.251)
(P.117)
(P.249)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.265)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.156)
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
59
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
VSA
ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
KEYLESS ACCESS
SYSTEM INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
SECURITY
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
(AFS) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.66)
(P.60, 348)
(P.64)
(P.60, 348)
(P.60, 349)
(P.65, 272)
(P.69)
(P.64)
(P.65, 277)
(P.62)
(P.21, 60)
(P.61, 350)
(P.62, 275)
(P.67, 107)
(P.64)
(P.63, 281)
(P.66)
(P.67)
(P.63, 281)
(P.64)
(P.62)
(P.33, 61)
(P.66)
MESSAGE INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
SH-AWD INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.32, 61)
ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLED
POWER STEERING
SYSTEM (ECPS)
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). It
reminds you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts. A beeper also
sounds if you have not fastened your
seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) before fastening your belt, the
beeper sounds and the indicator
flashes. If you do not fasten your
seat belt before the beeper stops, the
indicator stops flashing but remains
on.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running, or if a
‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’
message is on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page .
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged, and you will also see
a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page .
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals, and you
will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
348
348
349
77
Instrument Panel Indicators
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
60
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the rear brakes, axles, and
tires.
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a chime will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
system. You will also see a
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ). For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II). If it comes on at any other time,
it indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
automatic seat belt tensioners, or
side curtain airbags. You will also see
a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ). For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If
it comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
). For more information, see
page .
1.
2.
76
350
76
76
32
33
77
Instrument Panel Indicators
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
Side Airbag Off Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Instruments and Controls
61
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. This indicator
will also come on when the light
switch is in AUTO and the lights
turn on automatically. If you turn the
ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0) without turning off the
light switch, this indicator will
remain on. A reminder chime will
also sound when you open the driver’s
door.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II). It will then go off
if you have a properly-coded remote.
If it is not a properly-coded remote,
the indicator will blink and the
engine will not start (see page ).
If you use the remote, this indicator
blinks several times when you turn
the ignition switch from
ACCESSORY (I) to LOCK (0).
If you use the built-in key, this
indicator blinks several times when
you turn the ignition switch from ON
(II) to ACCESSORY (I).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this indicator comes
on at any other time, there is a
problem in the ABS. If this happens,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With this indicator
on, your vehicle still has normal
braking ability but no anti-lock
function. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display (see
page ). For more information, see
page .
275
114
76
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator Immobilizer System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
62
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
This indicator has three functions.
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). For more
information, see page .
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicator does not
blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
means one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signals blink. All
turn signals on the outside of the
vehicle should flash.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), there is a problem with the
VSA system. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display (see
page ). Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked. Without
VSA, your vehicle still has normal
driving ability, but will not have VSA
traction and stability enhancement.
For more information, see page .
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
1.
2.
3.
281
281
76
281
316
76
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Instruments and Controls
63
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page ).
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon. You will also see a
‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
106 104
201
106
77
Instrument Panel Indicators
Fog Light Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
64
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure on the multi-
information display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service.
For more information, see page .
Pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
pressure.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If this
indicator comes on at any other time,
there is a problem in the SH-AWD
system. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
SH-AWD SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
). Take your vehicle to a dealer to
have it checked. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates the differential
temperature is too high.
You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
If the indicator blinks while driving,
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.
336
36076
272
77
76
SH-AWD Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
65
Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition to ON (II)
and goes off after the engine starts.
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the power
steering system. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK POWER STEERING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ). If
this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine, and watch this indicator. If it
does not go off, or comes back on
again while driving, take the vehicle
to your dealer to have it checked.
With the indicator on, the ECPS is
turned off, which could make the
vehicle harder to steer.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on at any other time, it indicates that
there is a problem with the system.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ). For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message in the multi-
information display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page ) to see the message (see
page ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
The indicator comes on when you
gun the engine while the vehicle is
not moving. To turn the indicator off,
restart the engine.
76
140
77
76
69
Instrument Panel Indicators
Keyless Access System
Indicator
Message IndicatorElectronically Controlled
Power Steering System
(ECPS) Indicator
66
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the Adaptive Front
Lighting System (AFS).
This indicator blinks when there is a
problem with the AFS system; you
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ADAPTIVE
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ). If this
happens, stop the vehicle in a safe
place, turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), and
restart the engine. If the indicator
does not go off or blinks again, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page .
76
107
200
Adaptive Front Lighting
(AFS) System Indicator
Security System Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
67
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper end of the white section of the
gauge. If it reaches the red (hot)
mark, pull safely to the side of the
road. For more information, see page
.
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
The needle returns to the
bottom after you turn off the
ignition.
345
Gauges
Temperature Gauge
Fuel Gauge
68
U.S. model is shown.
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably.
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving.
You can change the display and
customize your vehicle control
settings by pressing the SEL/RESET
or INFO buttons on the right side of
the steering wheel.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the lower part of the
multi-information display changes as
shown in the illustration, each time
you press the SEL/RESET button.
When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the
multi-information display. When you
turn the ignition switch from ON (II)
position to ACCESSORY (I) position,
a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message is shown on
the display.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
69
SEL
RESET
BUTTON
U.S.
CANADA
INFO ( / )
BUTTONS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, then
press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page ).84
Multi-Information Display
Odometer Trip Meter
70
ODOMETER
TRIP METER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Centigrade temperature in Canadian
models.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
This shows the remaining life of the
engine oil. It shows 100% after the
engine oil is replaced and the display
is reset. The engine oil life is
calculated based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions. For more information,
see page .
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page ).
291
83
Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
71
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
U.S.
CANADA
ENGINE OIL LIFE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the upper part of the
display changes, as shown in the
illustration, each time you press the
button. If you press the button,
the display returns to the previous
message.
Multi-Information Display
72
U.S. CANADA
If ON
Press button
Press button
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:
Range is the estimated distance you
cantravelonthefuelremainingin
the tank. This distance is estimated
from the fuel economy you received
over the last several miles, so it will
vary with changes in speed, traffic,
etc.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.When Trip A is reset, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When Trip B is reset, average fuel
economy B is reset at the same time.
Instant Fuel Economy
Range
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
Average Fuel Economy
Trip Computer
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
73
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This monitor shows how much
torque is being delivered to each
wheel. For more information, see
page .
Whenthetirepressuremonitoris
shown on the multi-information
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown.
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page .277
272
Multi-Information Display
SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor
Tire Pressure Monitor
74
U.S.
Canada
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
Acura’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system without touching your cell
phone.
When the engine oil life reaches 15
percent, the display shows
‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ and the
code for the maintenance items to be
performed.
When the engine oil life reaches 5
percent, the display shows
‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ along with
the same maintenance items.
Have your dealer do the indicated
maintenance as soon as you see this
message, and have them reset the
display after completing the service.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance or do not reset the
display, the message changes to
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when the
engine oil life becomes 0 percent.
These messages appear on the multi-
information display each time you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
For details on engine oil life and
maintenance messages, refer to page
.
Also refer to page for important
maintenance safety precautions.
To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to the HFL and how
to receive or make phone calls.
291
290
230
HandsFreeLink Maintenance Messages
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
75
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a problem is detected with
your vehicle, a message will be
shown on the multi-information
display.
If this happens, refer to the
applicable pages of this owner’s
manual, and follow the instructions.
Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display.
When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the
messages every 5 seconds.
The message is shown until you
push the INFO button.
To see the message again, press the
INFO button, 5 seconds after the
display disappears.
See page
61, 350
See page
350
See page
60, 348
See page
60, 349
See page
60, 348
See page
264
See page
347
See page
62, 275
See page
63, 281
See page
67, 107
See page
66
See page
65, 272
See page
265
See page
32, 61
Multi-Information Display
Message Display
76
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
−〜＋
−〜＋
±
±
With the multi-information display
and the , , and SEL/RESET
buttons on the right side of the
steering wheel, you can change
several vehicle control settings to
your preference (see page ).
To change the settings, the ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position.
Here are the settings you can
change:
81
CUSTOMIZE MENU
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
5°F 5°F
3°C 3°C
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ALL DOORS
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
60 SEC
30 SEC
15 SEC
60 SEC
30 SEC
See page
83
See page
83
See page
84
See page
86
See page
86
See page
89
See page
89
See page
90
See page
92
See page
92
LANGUAGE
SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A
RESET with REFUEL
EXIT
MEMORY POSITION
LINK
AUTO TILT &
TELESCOPIC
EXIT
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP
EXIT
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER
METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DEFAULT
ENGLISH
0°F
0°C
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
30 SEC
15 SEC
CUSTOMIZE SET UP
DRIVER DOOR ONLY
CUSTOMIZE GROUP
DRIVER
DOOR ONLY
Multi-Information Display
Customized Settings
78
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), or
move the shift lever out of Park, the
display will change to the normal
screen.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure your remote is linked to
the system (see
on page ). Then use your
remote to unlock the doors (see
on page ).
When the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position, the multi-
information display shows the driver’s
ID.
You cannot customize the setting;
When the keyless memory
settings are off (see page ).
When you disconnect the vehicle
battery, and then do not unlock
the door.
When the multi-information
display does not show the driver’s
ID.
86
88
167
CUSTOMIZE MENU
15 SEC
0SEC
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPD
OFF
SHIFT TO P
IGN OFF
OFF
DRIVER DOOR
ALL DOORS
ON
OFF
90 SEC
60 SEC
30 SEC
INTERMITTENT
WITH VEH SPD
DEFAULT
15 SEC
MID
WITH VEH
SPD
SHIFT TO
P
DRIVER
DOOR
ON
30 SEC
WITH VEH
SPD
See page
92
See page
93
See page
95
See page
96
See page
97
See page
97
See page
98
See page
100
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
WIPER SETUP
HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
EXIT
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
EXIT
WIPER ACTION
EXIT
EXIT
CUSTOMIZE SET UPCUSTOMIZE GROUP
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Multi-Information Display
Memory Position
Link
Keyless Access Setup
Instruments and Controls
79
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
press the INFO button for more than
3 seconds then release it. The
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen will be
shown.
Select DEFAULT ALL, and press
the SEL/RESET button.
Select SET, and press the SEL/
RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen appears.
If you select EXIT and press the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen
appears again.
If the message shown above appears
on the multi-information display
while you are customizing the
settings, this message lets you know
the setting has not changed.
Multi-Information Display
Setting to Default Setting Incomplete
80
Press the SET/RESET buton.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
▲▼
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration. Select
which of these customize groups you
want to change:
If you select EXIT and press the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen is
shown again.
WIPER SET UP
DOOR/WINDOW SET UP
LIGHTING SET UP
KEYLESS ACCESS SET UP
POSITION SET UP
METER SET UP
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
Selecting a Customize Group
Instruments and Controls
81
Press the or button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
TO METER
SET UP
seepage82
TO POSITION
SET UP
seepage85
TO KEYLESS
ACCESS SET UP
seepage88
TO LIGHTING
SET UP
seepage91
TO DOOR/
WINDOW SET UP
seepage94
TO WIPER
SET UP
seepage99
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
▲▼
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration.
Here are the settings you can
customize in this mode:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESET
with REFUEL
If you select EXIT by pressing the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen is
shown again.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
Select METER SET UP, and press
the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
Meter Setup
82
Press the or button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
▲▼
▲▼
Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
You can adjust the outside
temperature shown on the multi-
information display in the range of
5°F ( 3°C) to 5°F (3°C).
Adjust the temperature by pressing
the or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
You can select the language shown
on the multi-information display to
English, French, or Spanish.
Select the desired language by
pressing the or button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
83
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
TripA&AVG.FUELAResetWith
Refuel
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
YoucansetwhetherornotTripA
and average fuel economy A are
reset when you refuel your vehicle.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
84
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
▲▼
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
Select POSITION SET UP, and press
the SEL/RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration.
If you select EXIT by pressing the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen is
shown again.
AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC
MEMORY POSITION LINK
Here are the settings you can
customize in this mode:
CONTINUED
Position Setup
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
85
Press the or button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Memory Position Link Auto Tilt & Telescopic
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When you turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0) and release it, or remove
the built-in key from the ignition
switch, the steering wheel
automatically moves fully in and up.
You can turn this feature on or off.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
When you unlock the doors by
pressing the button on the remote or
by grabbing the driver’s door handle
while carrying the remote, the
driver’s ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is
recognized, and the driver’s seat, the
steering wheel, and the outside
mirror positions move to their
memorized positions.
You can turn this feature on or off.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
Multi-Information Display
86
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
87
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
▲▼
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration.
Here are the settings you can
customize in this mode:
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
If you select EXIT and press the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is
shown again.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
Select KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
KEYLESS ACCESS Setup
88
Press the or button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
You can select whether the driver’s
door unlocks or all the doors unlock
when you unlock the doors by
grabbing the driver’s door handle
while carrying the remote.
Select the desired mode by pressing
the or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When you unlock the doors by
grabbing the driver’s door handle
while carrying the remote, some
exterior lights will blink twice.
When you lock the doors touching
the door lock sensor while carrying
the remote, some exterior lights will
blink once.
You can turn this feature on or off.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
89
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
▲
▼
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
If you unlock the doors by grabbing
the driver’s door handle while
carrying the remote, the beeper
sounds twice. When you lock the
doors, the beeper sounds once.
You can turn this feature on or off.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
Keyless Access Beep
Multi-Information Display
90
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
▲▼
Each time you press the or
button, the screen changes as shown
in the illustration.
Here are the settings you can
customize in this mode:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
If you select EXIT and press the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is
shown again.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
Select LIGHTING SETUP, and press
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
Lighting Setup
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
91
Press the or button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
▲
▼
Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors (see page ). Select
how long it takes for the interior
lights to fade out (in seconds) from
60 SEC, 30 SEC, or 15 SEC by
pressing the or button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
SEL/RESET button.
Select how long it takes for the
exterior lights to turn off (in
seconds)from60SEC,30SEC,15
SEC,or0SEC,bypressingthe or
button, and enter your selection
by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate light turn off after the selected
time when you close the driver’s
door and take the remote with you.
160
Multi-Information Display
92
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
▲▼
−
Auto Light Sensitivity
The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and ambient light
reaches a customizable level.
You can select the auto light
sensitivity.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
MAX
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
bright.
HIGH
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
somewhat bright.
LOW
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
somewhat dark.
MIN
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitis
dark.
Select from the five levels of
sensitivity by pressing the or
button, and enter your selection by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
MID
Theheadlightscomeonwhenitisas
bright as sunset or sunrise.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
93
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
Select DOOR/WINDOW SET UP,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration.
Here are the settings you can
customize in this mode:
DOOR LOCK MODE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
If you select EXIT and press the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is
shown again.
Door/Window Setup
Multi-Information Display
94
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
▲▼
You can select from three possible
settings for auto door lock:
SHIFT FROM P
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPD
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
CONTINUED
Auto Door Lock
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
95
Press the or button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
▲▼
−
−
▲▼
Auto Door Unlock
You can select from three possible
settings for auto door unlock:
SHIFT TO P The driver’s door or
all the doors, depending on your
selection in DOOR LOCK MODE
(see page ), unlock whenever
you move the shift lever to Park.
OFF
The auto door lock is deactivated all
the time.
Select the desired condition by
pressing the or button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
SEL/RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
IGN OFF The driver’s door or all
doors, depending on your selection
in DOOR LOCK MODE (see page
), unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0).
OFF The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the or button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
SEL/RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.97
97
Multi-Information Display
96
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Keyless Lock AcknowledgmentDoor Lock Mode
If you unlock the doors by pressing
the button on the remote, you can
select whether the driver’s door
unlocks or all the doors unlock.
Select the desired mode by pressing
the or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
When you press the LOCK button
on the remote a second time within 5
seconds after you lock the doors, the
hood, and the trunk with the remote,
a beeper will sound and the exterior
lights will blink once to verify that
the doors are locked and the security
system is ready.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
▲▼
Select the desired time by pressing
the or button and, enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
If you unlock the doors by pressing
the button on the remote or
grabbing the driver’s door handle
while carrying the remote, but do not
open any of the doors within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
You can select this relock time to be
90, 60, or 30 seconds.
When you press the UNLOCK
buttonontheremoteasecondtime
within 5 seconds after you unlock
the doors with the remote, the
beeper will sound twice and the
exterior lights will blink twice to
verify that the doors are unlocked
and the security system is turned off.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
If you do not want the beeper to
sound and the exterior lights to blink,
select OFF by pressing the or
button, and enter your selection by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Security Relock Timer
Multi-Information Display
98
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
▲▼
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
If you select EXIT and press the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is
shown again.
You can customize the WIPER
ACTION in this mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration.
Select WIPER SET UP, and press
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Wiper Setup
Instruments and Controls
99
Press the or button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
−
−
Wiper Action
You can select from two settings
when the wiper switch is in the INT
position.
To exit this mode without changing
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Select the desired mode by pressing
the or button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
WITH VEH SPD
The wiper intermittent operation
changes with vehicle speed.
INTERMITTENT
The wiper intermittent operation
varies according to the time selected
on the wiper lever.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
Multi-Information Display
100
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
Canadian models only
Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
1:
2:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Instruments and Controls
101
MIRROR CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT
PANEL BRIGHTNESS
STEERING WHEEL
AUDIO CONTROLS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
WINDSHIELD
WIPER/WASHER
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
MULTI INFORMATION BUTTONS
(P.104)
(P.69)
(P.109)
(P.102)
HANDSFREELINK
BUTTONS
HORN
(P.282)
(P.231)
(P.143)
(P.108)
(P.142) /
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNAL/FOG
LIGHTS
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH
PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P.267)
(P.111)
(P.198)
(P.123)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
SEAT HEATER AND
SEAT VENTILATION
BUTTONS
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.201)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON
(P.123)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.109)
(P.33)
(P.110) /
TM
2
1
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull back
and hold the wiper control lever.
The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run
at low speed, then complete one
more sweep after you release the
lever.
To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’
setting, see page .
The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle speed.
Ifyouturnittotheshortestdelay,
the wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the switch on the left lever is
turned to the AUTO or ‘‘ ’’
position, the headlight washers also
work while the lever is held.
The headlight washers use the same
fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 100
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
Windshield Washer
INT
Windshield Wipers and Washers
(On Canadian models)
Headlight Washers
102
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The windshield wiper arms have two
parked positions: winter and summer.
In the winter position, the arms sit
slightly above the edge of the hood.
This reduces the possibility of
damage to the wiper arms or
windshield wiper motor by a build-up
of snow and ice.
A heavy build-up of snow or ice on
the wiper arms will cause them to
automatically park in the winter
position.
Adjust the wiper arms to the winter
position by holding both arms as
shown in the illustration at the same
time. Pull on the arm, parallel to the
windshield, until it locks in the
higher position.
To return to the summer position,
pushthesameareaofbotharmsthe
other direction.
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Wiper Arm Positions
Instruments and Controls
103
WIPER ARMS
Winter position
WIPER ARMS
Summer position
HOLDING
LOCATIONS
HOLDING
LOCATIONS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and indicator lights
AUTO
Headlights on
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Fog lights off
Fog lights on
The rotating switch
on the left lever controls the lights.
Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the parking lights,
taillights, instrument panel lights,
side-marker lights, and rear license
plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch released after turned
to the LOCK (0) position or when
the built-in key is removed from the
ignition switch, you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The blue high beam indicator will
come on (see page ). Pull it back
to return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beamsstayonaslongasyouhold
the lever back.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
64
Turn Signal
Headlights
High Beams
Turn Signal, Headlights
104
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The automatic lighting feature is
controlledbyasensorlocatedontop
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
thatyouturnonthelightsmanually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
structures.To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO at any time.
The lights will come on automatically
when the outside light level becomes
low (at dusk, for example). The
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. The lights and indicator
will turn off automatically when the
system senses high ambient light.
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page .
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
weekormore).Youshouldalsoturn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.
The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights, all
other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights when it
senses low ambient light.
The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you open
and close the driver’s door. To turn
them on again, either turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) or turn the
light switch to .
93
Headlights
AUTO
Instruments and Controls
105
LIGHT
SENSOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off.
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
switch off, even if you set the
parking brake.
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0) and close the
driver’s door.
To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page .
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the left
column to turn them on.
The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), then open and close the
driver’s door.
If you turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0) with the headlight switch
on, but do not open the door and get
out, the lights turn off after 10
minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is
in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).
The lights turn on again when you
unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.92
Headlights
Fog Lights
Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting Off Feature
106
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The adaptive front lighting system
(AFS) helps to improve visibility
during nighttime driving. The AFS
controls the aiming direction and
lighting distribution of the low
beams according to the amount of
turn applied to the steering wheel
during cornering or turning. To turn
the AFS on, turn the ignition to ON
(II), and turn the headlights on.
If the AFS indicator comes on and
starts blinking while driving, pull to
the side of the road when it is safe,
and turn off the engine. If the AFS
indicator keeps blinking, or starts
blinking again while driving after
turning the ignition switch to ON (II),
the AFS is not working properly (see
page ). Have the AFS inspected
by your dealer.
When the AFS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
Without AFS, your vehicle still has
normal lighting ability to continue
driving.
67
76
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
AFS Indicator
Instruments and Controls
107
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This switch is at the right side of the
left vent. Press it to turn the AFS on
and off. When AFS is off, the AFS
indicator comes on as a reminder
whenyouturnontheheadlights.
Here are some operating
characteristics of the AFS:
The system requires an
initialization period. It does not
begin to operate until you have
driven the vehicle a short distance.
At a stop, the right headlight turns
right when you turn the steering
wheel to the right. But the left
headlight does not turn left when
you turn the steering wheel to the
left.Thispreventstheleft
headlight from pointing at
oncoming traffic.
AFS is turned off when the shift
lever is in the R position.
The AFS works with the automatic
headlight adjusting system to sense
changes in vehicle height due to
driving and loading conditions of
passengers and luggage, and adjusts
the vertical aim of the low beam
headlights automatically adjusted to
compensate for load.
If the headlights do not seem to be
properly aimed, have the Auto
Leveling system inspected by your
dealer.
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
AFS Off Switch Automatic Headlight Adjusting
System
108
AFS OFF SWITCH
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−＋
−
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
Adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel by pressing the
or button. Press the button to
increase the brightness and the
button to decrease it. You can adjust
the brightness with the headlight
switch on or off.
The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
CONTINUED
Instrument Panel BrightnessHazard Warning Button
Hazard Warning Button, Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
109
ADJUSTMENT BUTTON
U.S.
CANADA
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
The rear window defogger clears fog,
frost,andthinicefromthewindow.
Push the defogger button to turn it
onandoff.Pushingthisbuttonalso
turns the mirror heaters on and off.
The indicator in the button comes on
to show the defogger is on. If you do
not turn it off, the defogger will shut
itself off after 5 to 40 minutes
(depending on the ambient
temperature). It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn it on again when you
restart the vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or . To cancel the glare
reduction function, set the
brightness to the highest level, then
press the button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled.
Rear Window Defogger
Instrument Panel Brightness, Rear Window Defogger
110
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Move the steering wheel in, out, up,
or down by pushing and holding the
adjustment switch in that direction.
Release the switch when the
steering wheel reaches the desired
position. Make sure the steering
wheel points towards your chest, not
toward your face, and that you can
see the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
CONTINUED
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
111
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0) and release it, or remove
the built-in key from the ignition
switch, the steering wheel
automatically moves fully in and up.
The steering wheel returns to its
original position when you push the
ignition switch or insert the built-in
key back in the ignition switch.
Steering wheel movement is also
controlled by the driving position
memory system (see page ).
To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT &
TELESCOPIC’’ setting, see page .
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
fuse for the power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel is removed, the
power tilt and telescopic steering
wheel system needs to be reset
when you reconnect the battery or
installing the fuse.
Push the ignition switch for more
than 1 second and release it, or
insert the built-in key into the
ignition switch, and remove it. The
steering wheel automatically moves
fully in and up to let you know the
system is reset.
Move the steering wheel to the
highest position and keep that
position by pushing and holding the
adjustment button for more than 1
second. Then, move the steering
wheel to the most inward position,
and keep that position by pushing
and holding the adjustment button
for more than 1 second.
86
124
To reset the system when the auto tilt
and telescopic feature is turned on, do
this:
To reset the system when the auto tilt
and telescopic feature is turned off, do
this:
Steering Wheel Adjustments
112
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Acura-approved key blanks.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
The built-in key (see page ) fits
all the locks on your vehicle.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
141
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
113
KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the immobilizer system
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
remote or built-in key. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0), release
the ignition switch and push it, or
remove the built-in key, and reinsert
it.ThenturntheswitchtoON(II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II).
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your remote
or built-in key, contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
If you have lost your remote or
built-in key and cannot start the
engine, contact your dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.
Immobilizer System
114
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or
remove the built-in key only in this
position. To turn the ignition switch,
the shift lever must be in Park, and
you must push the knob or built-in
key in slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the ignition switch. Firmly
turn the steering wheel to the left or
right as you turn the ignition switch.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power socket in this
position.
This is the normal
ignition switch position when driving.
Several of the indicators on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from ACCESSORY (I) to ON (II).
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the ignition switch.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you do not turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0) or leave the built-in key in
the ignition switch in the LOCK (0)
or ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
built-in key to turn off the beeper.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark
before you turn the ignition switch
knob to LOCK (0) or remove the
built-in key from the ignition switch.
To use the built-in key, you have to
remove the cover (see page ).138
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Instruments and Controls
115
IGNITION SWITCH
COVER
BUILT-IN KEY
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each door has a lock tab above the
inside door handle. Pull the tab to
lock the door and push it to unlock.
Whenyoupullthetabonthedriver’s
door, all the doors lock.
To lock any door when getting out of
the vehicle, pull the lock tab and
close the door.
All doors can be locked from the
outside by using the built-in key in
the driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the built-in key,
turn it clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors unlock when you
turn the built-in key a second time
within a few seconds.
Each front door has a power door
lock master switch. Either switch
locks and unlocks all doors. Push the
switch down to lock all doors and up
to unlock them.
To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page .
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (about 15 km/h) or
more, all the doors lock
automatically.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page .
When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page .
With the driver’s door open and the
built-in key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if the
driver’s door is closed. Pushing the
switch down on the open front
passenger’s door will lock all doors.
If you try to lock an open driver’s
door by pulling the lock tab rear
wardwiththeremoteinsidethe
vehicle and closing the driver’s door,
the all doors will unlock.
89
95
96
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention
116
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery goes dead or
is disconnected, you can open the
trunk from the rear seat by pulling
the trunk release handle. Reach the
handle through the trunk pass-
through.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote.
If the doors are unlocked, press
the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
Press the trunk release button on
the driver’s door.
Youcanopenthetrunkinanyof
four ways:
If the doors are locked, press the
boot release button on the boot lid
with the remote in keyless Access
operating range.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
54
CONTINUED
Trunk
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Instruments and Controls
117
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the right corner in
the trunk so the trunk can be opened
from the inside. To open the trunk,
push the release lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page .
To protect items in the trunk, you
can disable the trunk-release button
on the driver’s door, the trunk lid,
andtheremote.Todothis,turnoff
the trunk main switch in the glove
box, lock the glove box, and lock the
trunk pass-through cover with the
built-in key.
40
Trunk, Childproof Door Locks
Childproof Door LocksEmergency Trunk Opener
118
LEVER
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH
RELEASE
LEVER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down and the
rear of the seat up or
down. (Driver’s seat
only)
Raises or lowers the seat.
(Driver’s seat only)
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
14 15
Front Seat Power Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
119
PASSENGER’S SEATDRIVER’S SEAT
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
16
Your vehicle has adjustable head
restraints on the front seats.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries.
Theyaremosteffectivewhenyou
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
The head restraints adjust for height.
The tilt of the front head restraints is
also adjustable. You need both hands
to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
sideways, and push the restraint
down. To adjust the tilt, pivot the
front head restraint to the desired
position.
You can raise the rear head
restraints by hand.
To lower the rear head restraints for
better visibility, press the rear head
restraint tilt button on the ceiling
console.
Head Restraints
Seats
120
FRONT
RELEASE BUTTON
REAR
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
TILT BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.
Open the cover by pushing the knob
and pulling the cover down. To close
the cover, swing it up, and push
firmly on the top. Make sure it
latches properly.
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the pass-
through are secured.
For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
built-in key. To lock the cover, insert
thekey,andturnitclockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and
the trunk lid open.
See on
page .54
Rear Seat Armrest Trunk Pass-through Cover
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Seats
Instruments and Controls
121
COVER
KNOB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this sensing.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
Mirrors
122
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
SENSOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Depending on the position of the
selector switch, the left or right side
mirror will pivot downward slightly
when you shift the transmission into
reverse. In the left position, the left
mirror pivots. In the right position,
the right mirror pivots. This gives
you a better view of that side of the
vehicle while parallel parking. The
mirror returns to its original position
when you take the transmission out
of reverse. To turn this feature off,
leave the switch in the center
position.
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page ).
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
3.
1.
2.
124
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Power Mirror Heaters
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
123
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
SELECTOR
SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
You cannot add a new driving
position in the memory unless the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. You can recall a
memorized position with the
ignition switch in any position.
Adjust the steering wheel to a
comfortable position (see page
).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page ).
Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page ).
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the steering wheel, driver’s seat,
and outside mirror positions.
Two seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirror positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
select a memorized position by
pushing the appropriate button.
Press the MEMO button on the
driver’s door. You will hear a beep.
The indicator in the memory
buttons (1 and 2) will blink.
Immediately press one of the
memory buttons (1 or 2) until you
hear two beeps. The indicator in
the memory button will stay on.
The current positions of the
driver’s seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirrors are now stored.
3.
1.
2.
119
123
111
Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Driving Position Memory System
124
MEMORY
BUTTONS
MEMO BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To select a memorized position, do
this:
Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep.
The system will move the seat,
steering wheel, and outside mirrors
to the memorized positions. The
indicator in the selected memory
button will flash during movement.
When the adjustments are complete,
you will hear two beeps, and the
indicator will remain on.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park.
To change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting, see page
.
To cancel the storing procedure
after pressing the MEMO button:
Do not press a memory button
within 5 seconds.
Readjust the outside mirror
position.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
Readjust the seat or steering
position.
1.
2.
86
CONTINUED
Selecting a Memorized Position
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
125
MEMORY BUTTONS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press any button on the control
panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
Shift out of Park.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat or steering
wheel.
If you select a memorized position
without pushing the ignition switch
knob or inserting the built-in key in
the ignition switch, only the seat and
outside mirrors will adjust. To get
the system to also adjust the steering
wheel, push and turn the ignition
switch or insert the built-in key in
the ignition switch. You will hear two
beeps when it is complete.
You can use the adjustment switches
to change the positions of the seat,
steering wheel, or outside mirrors
after they are in their memorized
position. If you change the
memorized position, the indicator in
the memory button will go out. To
keep this driving position for later
use, you must store it in the driving
position memory.
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of the following:
Driving Position Memory System
126
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has the Keyless Access
System. When you carry the remote
with you, you can lock/unlock the
door(s), unlock the trunk, and start
the engine without using the built-in
key.
The system may not work if:
Thebatteryoftheremoteisweak.
You carry a cell phone, a laptop
computer, or other electrical
device near the remote.
There is strong electrical current
nearby.
The remote is covered by metal.
A vehicle is being operated with a
transmitter nearby.
When the remote battery is dead.
Protect the remote and the built-in
key from direct sunlight, high
temperature, and high humidity.
Always keep the remote and the
built-in key away from any magnetic
material.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your built-in key.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
UseonlyAcura-approvedkeyblanks.
When the vehicle battery is dead.
Make sure the driver always carries
the remote/built-in key set.
Do not drop the remote or the
built-in key, and do not set heavy
objects on them.
The built-in keys do not contain
batteries.
Keep the remote and the built-in key
away from liquids. If they get wet,
dry them immediately with a soft
cloth.
Keyless Access System
Instruments and Controls
127
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This remote is used to lock/unlock
the doors and unlock the trunk.
When you carry the remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors, unlock the
trunk, and start the engine without a
key.
You can lock/unlock the doors
within a about 32 inches (about 80
cm) radius from the outside door
handle.
The following keys come with your
vehicle. Refer to page for how to
separate the keys.
This key is used to lock/unlock the
doors, glove box, trunk pass-through
cover, and to start the engine (after
you remove the ignition switch cover,
see page ).
Youcanopenthetrunkwithina
about 32 inches (about 80 cm) radius
fromthetrunkreleaseswitch.
It is above or below the vehicle,
even when it is within its operating
range.
It is too close to the vehicle.
Theremotemaynotworkif:
Anyone can lock/unlock a door or
open the trunk if the remote is
within the operating range of the
door or the trunk.
141
138
Keys
Keyless Access System
Built-in Key
Keyless Access Remote
128
BUILT-IN KEYS
OPERATING
RANGE
KEY NUMBER TAG
KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTES
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The handle of each front door has a
sensor. That sensor works with the
remote so you can automatically
unlock/lock the door(s).
If you do not open any of the doors
within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.
The unlock sensors do not operate
when:
Theremoteisnotwithinthe
operating range.
To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page .
If a remote is within operating range
while you wash your vehicle or when
it is raining heavily, the door sensors
may respond by unlocking the doors.
When you unlock the door(s), some
exterior lights blink twice and the
system beeps twice.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page .
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
By default, only the driver’s door
unlocks when you grab its handle.
All the doors unlock when you grab
the handle of the front passenger’s
door.
When the doors are unlocked.
The vehicle battery is dead.
Theremotebatteryisdead.
If you grab the handle of the front
door by the hand with glove, the
door sensor may delay to respond or
not respond by unlocking the doors.
90
89
89
Unlocking the Door(s)
Keyless Access System
Instruments and Controls
129
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each front door has a LOCK/
UNLOCK feature.
When you touch the door lock
sensor of the front door by the hand,
all the doors and the trunk will lock.
If you touch the door lock sensor of
the front door by the hand with glove,
the door sensor may delay to
respond or not respond by locking
the doors.
Theremoteisnotwithinthe
operating range.
The lock sensors do not operate if:
The built-in key is in the ignition
switch.
The doors are open.
The ignition switch is not in the
LOCK (0) position.
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
The vehicle battery is dead.
Theremotebatteryisdead.
When you lock the doors, some
exterior lights blink once and the
system beeps once. When you
cannot set the security system
because the trunk or hood is open,
no exterior light blinks and/or no
beeper sounds.
Before locking the doors, make sure
theremoteisnotinsidethevehicle.
If a remote is within operating range
while you wash your vehicle or when
it is raining heavily, the door sensors
may respond by locking the doors.
Within 2 seconds of touching the
handle to lock the doors or locking
the doors with remote, pull the
handletomakesurethedoorsare
actually locked. The door unlock
sensors do not operate for about 2
seconds after the doors are locked.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page .
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
.
90
89
Locking the Doors
Keyless Access System
130
DOOR LOCK SENSOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before closing the trunk, make sure
theremoteisnotinthetrunk.
If you close the trunk when the
remote is in it, the system beeps, and
the trunk reopens.
When you close the trunk with all
doors locked, the trunk will lock.
When you unlock all the doors with
the remote, built-in key or power
door lock master switch, the trunk
will unlock.
Use the pull handle when you close
the trunk.
If you open a door, pull its lock tab,
and shut it when the remote is inside
the vehicle, all the doors unlock.
Make sure you carry the remote
with you when you lock the doors.
Keyless Access System
Locking the Trunk
Door Lock Prevention
Instruments and Controls
131
PULL HANDLE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The trunk cannot be locked if:
The remote is too close to the
trunk lid.
Theremoteisontheinteriorrear
panel.
The remote is too close to the
seatback of the rear seat or the
seat cushion.
When the trunk is locked, you can
open it in any of these ways:
Press the trunk open switch inside
the vehicle.
Press the trunk button on the
remote.
Pull the trunk release switch when
carrying the remote (the system
beeps once).
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
Pressthisbuttononceto
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash. When you push LOCK
twice within 5 seconds, you will hear
a beep to verify that the doors are
locked and the security system is
ready.
54
Keyless Access System
Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Keyless Access Remote
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
LOCK
132
LED
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
− To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 1 second to open the trunk.
You cannot open the trunk if the
built-in key is in the ignition or the
ignition switch is in any position
except the LOCK (0) position. You
cannot open the trunk with the
remote if the trunk main switch is
turned off.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, see
page .
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
thehornwillsoundandtheexterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote.
You cannot lock the doors if any
door, the trunk, or the hood is not
fully closed if the built-in key is in
the ignition switch, or if the ignition
switch is in any position except the
LOCK (0) position.
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Press it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button. The
ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the DOOR position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
anydoorswithin30seconds,the
ceiling light fades out. If you relock
the doors with the remote before 30
seconds have elapsed, the ceiling
light will go off immediately.
If you unlock the doors with the
remote, but do not open any doors
within 30 seconds, the doors
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME,’’ see page .
To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page .
When you cannot set the security
system because the trunk or hood is
open, no exterior light blinks and/or
no beeps.
98
97
89
92
Keyless Access System
TRUNK
PANIC
UNLOCK
Instruments and Controls
133
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Here are the settings activated with
the remote;
Driving position memory
(see page ).
To turn off this feature, press and
hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttonsatthesametime.TheLED
in the remote will blink once. Then
release the buttons. Doing this
cancels the keyless memory settings
for that remote and restores the
default settings.
Audio system settings
(see page ).
Customized settings
(see page ).
Climate control settings
(see page ).
Navigation system preferences
(see the navigation system owner’s
manual).
When you unlock the door with your
remote, each remote activates the
keyless memory settings related to
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
1orDriver2)isshownontheback
of each remote.
Some of them keeps the same
settings as they were set previously.
To turn the keyless memory settings
back on, repeat this procedure. The
LED will blink twice to indicate the
feature has been turned on.
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
124
171
163
78
Keyless Access System
Keyless Memory Settings
Remote Transmitter Care
134
DRIVER’S ID
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Replace the batteries if necessary.
Battery type: CR2025
Remove the built-in key.
Remove the upper half by carefully
prying on the edge with a coin.
Replace the old batteries with new
batteries. Place the batteries so the
side is facing up. Snap the two
halvesoftheremotecaseback
together.
Keyless Access System
Replacing the Remote Battery
Instruments and Controls
135
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The engine may not run, and some
malfunctions may occur, if the
remote is:
The engine may not start if the
remote is subjected to strong radio
waves.
Also, the engine may not start if the
remote is too close to the windows.
Outside the vehicle.
On the dashboard.
On the rear interior panel.
In the glove box.
In the door pockets.
In the trunk, etc.
Keyless Access System
Ignition Switch Operating Range
136
Make sure you know where the remote
is when you are inside the vehicle.
Remember that you can start the engine
without using the built-in key when the
remote is inside the vehicle.
Make sure you always carry the remote
with you.
If you lose your remote, call Acura
Client Services at (800) 382-2238 (U.S.
models).
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you push the ignition switch,
theremoteandthevehiclerecognize
each other. After the recognition,
the remote indicator flashes, and a
beeper sounds once. After the beep,
turn the ignition switch.
When the remote is out of the
operating range, the ignition switch
is locked.
If the ignition switch cannot be
turned from the LOCK (0) position
to the ACCESSORY (I) position after
the beep, the steering wheel is
locked. To unlock the steering wheel,
turn it right and left while turning
the ignition switch at the same time.
Iftheremoteandthevehicledonot
recognize each other, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position, remove the ignition switch
cover, insert the built-in key, and
turn the switch (see pages and
).
To turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, put the
transmission in Park, press the
switch in, and turn it to LOCK (0).
When the transmission is not in Park,
you cannot turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) position.
If you open the driver’s door with the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) position, the beeper will sound.
Also, if you close the door when the
ignition switch is not in the LOCK
(0) position and the remote is not
inside the vehicle, the keyless access
alarm sounds outside the vehicle, a
message appears on the multi-
information display, and the beeper
sounds if the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position.
115
138
CONTINUED
Ignition Switch
Keyless Access System
Instruments and Controls
137
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you are pressing the ignition
switch, or when the ignition switch is
in the ON (II) position, the beeper
sounds if you take the remote out of
the vehicle and close the door.
To remove the ignition switch cover,
insert the built-in key (see page ),
then pull the cover out by pulling the
built-in key while pushing it.
When the beeper sounds after you
close the driver’s door outside the
vehicle, check the position of the
ignition switch and the location of
the remote.
If the engine is running and you
removetheremotefromthevehicle,
it will continue to run. But once
turned to the LOCK (0) position, the
engine will not restart until a remote
is brought back into the vehicle.
141
Keyless Access System
Beeper and MessageRemoving the Ignition Switch
Cover
Keyless Remote Not Detected
138
BUILT-IN KEY
IGNITION SWITCH COVER
push
pull
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thebatteriesintheremotenormally
lasts about 2 years. To ensure
maximum battery life, do not store
the remote close to electrical devices
such as computers or TVs. When the
multi-information display shows
‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE LOW
BATTERY,’’ replace the batteries as
soon as possible (see page ).
The engine does not restart if you
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
(0) position when the remote is
outside the vehicle. Check where the
remote is. Make sure that you carry
the remote or built-in key with you
when you operate the ignition switch.
When the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position, the multi-
information display shows
‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE NOT
DETECTED,’’ and the inside and
outside beepers sound.
The multi-information display
message goes away when you
bring the remote back inside the
vehicle, and close the door or
apply the parking brake.
The outside beeper sounds when
the ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
If the engine is running and you
removetheremotefromthe
vehicle, it will continue to run.
Once turned to the LOCK (0)
position, the engine will not restart
until a remote is brought back into
the vehicle.
If you pass the remote through an
open window, the system does not
respond.Also,evenwhentheremote
is inside the vehicle, the beeper may
sound when the location of the
remote is not detected due to
surrounding conditions. It is not a
failure. Make sure that you carry the
remote with you.
135
CONTINUED
Keyless Access System
Keyless Remote Low Battery
Instruments and Controls
139
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The indicator stays on while you
are driving.
The indicator comes on with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
The indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II). Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer if:
If you lose or drop your remote, and
the beeper sounds, contact Acura
Client Services at (800) 382-2238
(U.S. models)
The multi-information display
shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM.’’
In this case, use the built-in key to
lock/unlock the doors and start the
engine.
Keyless Access System
Check Keyless Access System
140
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thebuilt-inkeycanbeinsertedinto
the remote.
As shown above, keep inserting the
built-in key until it is locked. To
remove the built-in key, pull it out
while you press the release button.
To avoid damaging the remote and
the built-in key, never pull on the
built-in key unless you are pressing
the release button.
The trunk and glove box cannot be
opened when you turn the trunk
main switch off and lock the glove
box and trunk pass-through cover
with the built-in key. Also, the trunk
cannot be opened by using the
remote.
The keyless access system uses
electric current to identify the
remote with the vehicle.
If you use medical equipment such
as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your
doctor if the electric current used by
the remote will affect it.
Keyless Access System
Built-in key and Remote
Valet Function
Instruments and Controls
141
RELEASE BUTTON
BUILT-IN KEY
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag system.
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use the heaters.
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Seat Heaters (U.S. models)
142
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
▲
▲
−
−
−
−
▼
−
−
−
−
▲
▼
▼
▲
▼
To use the heaters, press the
button. The indicator next to the
button will come on. There are three
settings in the heaters:
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters and an air ventilation
system. The passenger seat only has
heaters in the seat bottom because
ofthesideairbagsystem.The
ignition switch must be in the ON
(II) position to use the heaters and
the air ventilation system.
In LOW, the heater runs
continuously.
When you press the button once,
the system is set to HI. To change to
the lower mode, press the button.
To turn the air ventilation off, press
the button until the indicators go
off.
HI Three indicators on.
MID Two indicators on.
LO One indicator on.
OFF All indicators off.
To ventilate the seat, press the
button. The indicator next to the
button will come on. The air
ventilation system has three settings:
HI Three indicators on.
MID Two indicators on.
LO One indicator on.
OFF All indicators off.
When you press the button once,
the heater is set to HI. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select MID or LOW by pressing the
button. This will keep the seat
warm. To shut down the heater,
press the button until the
indicators go off.
In HI, when the seat gets warm, the
heater will change to MID after
about 5 minutes.
In MID, the heater will change to
LOW after about 60 minutes.
CONTINUED
Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)
Instruments and Controls
143
BUTTON
BUTTON
INDICATORS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters and the seat
ventilation:
Use the HI setting only to heat or
to ventilate the seats quickly,
because it draws large amounts of
current from the battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters or the seat ventilation,
even on the LO setting. It can
weaken the battery, causing hard
starting.
Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)
144
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the MAIN switch is pushed down
(OFF), the passenger windows
cannot be raised or lowered. Keep
the MAIN switch off when you have
children in the vehicle so they do not
injure themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
before operating any of the window
switches. To open a window, push
the switch down and hold it. To close
the window, pull the switch up and
hold it. Release the switch to stop
the window.
CONTINUED
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
145
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
To open the window fully,
push the window switch firmly down
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the window fully, pull back
the window switch firmly to the
second detent, then release it. The
window automatically goes all the
way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.
To open or close the window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly to the first
detent, and hold it. The window will
stop when you release the switch.
All window switches also have the
AUTO feature.
If the window runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction, and then stop.
To close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
The indicators in the switches come
on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
The power windows have a key-off
delay. You can still open and close
the windows for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay cancels as soon as
you open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) for the power windows to
operate.
Auto Reverse
AUTO
Power Windows
146
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof from outside with the
remote.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again and hold it. If the
windows and the moonroof stop
before the desired position, repeat
steps 1 and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote.
You can open and close the windows
and moonroof with the built-in key in
the driver’s door lock.
Insert the built-in key in the driver’s
door lock.
To open:
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
Turn the built-in key clockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
open. To stop the windows and
moonroof, release the built-in key.
When the windows or moonroof
stops before opening fully, to open
the windows and moonroof further,
turnandholdthekeyagain
(within 15 seconds).
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the
doors unlock, and all four windows
and moonroof start to open. To
stop the windows and moonroof,
release the button.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Built-in
Key
Power Windows, Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
147
Open
Close
UNLOCK BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To close:
Insert the built-in key in the driver’s
door lock.
NOTE: If the windows and moonroof
stop before the desired position,
repeat steps 2 and 3.
To close the windows and
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 15 seconds).
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
moonroof, release the key.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch forward briefly.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
before operating the moonroof
switch on the ceiling console. To
open the moonroof, pull back the
moonroof switch. To close the
moonroof, push the moonroof switch
forward. Release the switch to stop
the moonroof.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power Windows, Moonroof
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
with the Ceiling Console Switch
148
MOONROOF SWITCH
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
on the moonroof switch lightly to the
first detent, and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.
To close the moonroof fully, push
the moonroof switch forward to the
second detent, then release it. The
moonroof closes all the way. To stop
the moonroof from closing all the
way, pull back the moonroof switch
briefly.
To tilt the moonroof, push the center
of the moonroof switch straight up.
To stop the moonroof from tilting
fully open, push the moonroof switch
forward.
Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
149
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the remote transmitter
or the key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
for details.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can still open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) for the moonroof to operate.
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
147
Moonroof
Operating the Moonroof with the
Remote Transmitter or the Key
Auto Reverse
150
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To apply the parking brake, push the
parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake indicator on the instrument
panel should go out when the
parking brake is fully released with
the engine running (see page ).61
Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
151
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes, axles, and tires. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is put into gear
with the parking brake on.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
152
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ASHTRAY
UTILITY POCKET
GLOVE BOX/OWNER’S MANUAL TRAY
FRONT DOOR POCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has an owner’s manual
tray inside the glove box. To open
the tray, push the release button up.
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the built-in key.
To close the tray, push it up.
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Instruments and Controls
153
RELEASE BUTTON
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For a short container, put the bottom
plate down, and pull up the knob to
use the separator.
For a long container, press the
button in the beverage holder to
raise the bottom plate. Stand the
separator up.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
To use the beverage holder, push
the lid.
Beverage Holders
Interior Convenience Items
154
LID
Press
BUTTON
Pull up
SEPARATOR
KNOB
BOTTOM PLATE
BOTTOM PLATE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear beverage holder is in the
rear seat armrest. Open the
beverage holder by pushing the front
of it.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the
armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
You can put small items in the tray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
lever, and lift the armrest pad.
The console compartment light is on
when the light switch is in the
or position.
Console Compartment
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
155
LEVER
LEVER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can extend the sun visor further
by pulling it back.
To use a sun visor, pull it down. You
can also use a sun visor at the side
window. Remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
There are two accessory power
sockets. One is located in the front
of the center console. To use the
power socket, push and release the
lid, then push it forward until the
socket comes to the proper position
to use.
Do not use the sun visor extension
feature over the rear view mirror.
Make sure to slide a sun visor
forward to set it to the normal length
before flipping it back in place.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Interior Convenience Items
Sun Visors Accessory Power Sockets
156
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Small, rear ashtrays are located in
the armrests of both rear doors. To
open an ashtray, pivot the lid up.
To remove an ashtray for emptying,
open the lid, then carefully pull the
tab inside ashtray straight up and out
of the armrest.
The other socket is under the
armrest in the console compartment
storage area. To use the power
socket, pull up the cover.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.
The rear ashtray light is on when the
light switch is in the or
position.
The interior of each front door has
an extendable pocket for maps and
other small, lightweight items. For
safety, be sure both front door
pockets are closed while driving.
When the light switch is in the
or position, the front door
pocket light is on.
Interior Convenience Items
Rear Ashtrays Front Door Pockets
Instruments and Controls
157
TAB
LID
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you shift to reverse, the
sunshade goes down automatically.
To use it again, shift to another
position, and push the button to raise
it.
If the sunshade stops while moving,
check for and clear any obstacles,
then push the button again.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, push the power
sunshade button on the ceiling
console to raise the rear sunshade.
Push the button again to lower it.
PowerRearSunshade
Interior Convenience Items
158
POWER REAR
SUNSHADE BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each rear door has an integrated
sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold
the tab on the top, insert the
sunshade into the holder, and pull
the sunshade all the way up. Insert
the holes on the sunshade into the
hooks on the window frame.
To prevent the integrated sunshades
from being unhooked due to winds,
leave the rear windows closed while
driving.
The hooks are intended for use only
by the sunshades. Do not hang any
other items on the hooks, as that
could interfere with proper operation
ofthesidecurtainairbags.
Integrated Sunshades
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
159
TAB
HOLE
HOOK
HOLDER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After pushing the DOOR button, all
the lights come on when you open
any door, unlock the doors with the
remote or built-in key, or turn the
ignition switch from the ON (II) or
ACCESSORY (I) position to the
LOCK (0) position. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
The front and rear of the ceiling
have ceiling lights.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
.
Push each ceiling light button to turn
its light on and off.
Push the ON button to turn on all the
ceiling lights. Push the OFF button
to turn them off. 92
Ceiling Lights
Interior Lights
160
ON
BUTTON
OFF
BUTTON
DOOR
BUTTON
FRONT
REAR
CEILING LIGHT
BUTTONS
CEILING LIGHT
BUTTONS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The standard audio system has
many features. This section de-
scribes those features and how to
use them.
The climate control systems in your
vehicle provide a comfortable driving
environment in all weather
conditions.
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate
......................................Control . 162
.............Climate Control Sensors . 170
...............................Audio System . 171
.........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 172
...........AM/FM Radio Reception . 176
....................Adjusting the Sound . 178
Playing the XM
Satellite
.........................................Radio . 181
................................Playing Discs . 187
.................Protecting Your Discs . 196
..Disc Changer Error Messages . 197
...............Remote Audio Controls . 198
................Radio Theft Protection . 199
...........................Security System . 200
..............................Cruise Control . 201
HomeLink Universal
...............................Transceiver . 204
.....................................AcuraLink . 208
...........................................OnStar . 217
.........................HandsFreeLink . 230
Theclimatecontrolsystemandthe
audio system have the voice control
feature. Refer to the navigation
system owner’s manual for this
feature.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
Features
Features
161
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
162
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AUTO
BUTTON
OFF
BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BARS
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
MIRROR
HEATER
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
A/C
BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many climate control functions can
still be controlled by standard
buttons, dials, and knobs, but some
functions can only be accessed using
the interface dial. The interface dial
has two parts, a knob and a selector.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER)togotothatselection.
When you unlock the doors with
your remote, the driver’s ID (Driver
1orDriver2)isdetected,andthe
climate control settings are turned to
the respective mode automatically
when the ignition is turned to the
ON (II) position.
Interface Dial Personalization Setting
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
Features
163
ENTER
SELECTOR
KNOB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To select the desired temperature,
push the temperature control bar up
or down.
To set the driver’s and passenger’s
temperature separately, press the
DUAL button. The indicator in the
button will come on. The driver and
passenger can each set the
temperature to the desired setting.
Press the A/C button to view the
climate control display, then turn the
interface knob to increase or
decrease the fan speed and airflow.
To make the driver’s and passenger’s
temperature the same, push the
DUAL button again. The indicator in
the button goes out, and the
passenger’s temperature is set to the
driver’s temperature.
Press the A/C button to view the
climate control display. Pushing
ENTER on the interface selector
turns the air conditioning on and off.
You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in
the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
Fan Control Temperature Control Bars Air Conditioning (A/C)
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
164
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
This button turns the windshield
defrost on and off.
You can select the vents air flows
from. Some air will flow from the
dashboard corner and side vents in
all modes.
When you push this button, air flows
from the defroster vents at the base
of the windshield, and the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. When
the indicator in the button is on, the
passenger’s temperature cannot be
set separately from the driver’s.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Press the A/C button to view the
climate control display, then push
the interface selector down. Select
any of the modes by turning the
interface knob.
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
110
CONTINUED
Recirculation Button Mode ControlWindshield Defroster Button
Rear Window Defogger
Button
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
Features
165
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When is selected, you can
increase or decrease the
temperature of airflow from the
dashboard vent for the driver’s side
and the passenger’s side without
changing the temperature of airflow
from the floor vent.
Push the interface selector right or
left,thenturntheinterfaceknobto
select the desired temperature.
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
166
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Press the A/C button to view
the climate control display.
Turn on the A/C by pushing
ENTER on the interface selector.
You will see A/C ON in the display.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Push the interface selector down,
then select by turning the
interface knob.
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Push the interface selector down,
then set the fan to the desired
speed by turning the interface
knob.
Press the A/C button to view
the climate control display.
Turn the interface knob to set the
fantothedesiredspeed.
Push the interface selector down,
then select and fresh air
mode.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control bars.
You can set the temperature for the
driver’s side and the passenger’s side
separately when this button is
pressed (indicator on). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature with the driver’s
side temperature control bar.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
68
If the interior is very warm,
Using the HeaterDual Button
Ventilation
Using the A/C
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
Features
167
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows: Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C setting
returns to the previous setting (on or
off). Select A/C, then press ENTER
on the interface selector to turn the
A/C off if it is on.
To clear the windshield faster, you
can close the dashboard corner vents
by rotating the wheel next it. This
sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
Switch the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Def rost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
168
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver and passenger. If the driver’s
side of the vehicle is getting too
much sun, the system will adjust to a
lower temperature.
Press the AUTO button.
Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control bars.
You will see AUTO in the display
iftheclimatemodeisselected.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or its upper limit, the system
runs at full cooling or heating only. It
does not regulate the interior
temperature.
When you change the fan speed, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode and
starts to run at the selected speed.
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Press the OFF button. However, a
lack of airflow can cause the
windowstofogup.Youshouldkeep
the fan on at all times so stale air and
moisture do not build up in the
interior and cause fogging.
1.
2.
Automatic Climate Control Semi-automatic Operation
To Turn Everything Off
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
Features
169
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
Climate Control Sensors
170
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a knob and a selector.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER)togotothatselection.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
When you unlock the doors with
your remote and turn the audio
system on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1
or Driver 2) is detected, and the
radio preset memory (see page ),
the auto select preset memory (see
page ), and the volume and
sound level settings (see page )
are turned to the respective
memorized mode automatically.
175
178
174
Interface Dial Personalization Setting
Audio System
Features
171
KNOB
ENTER
SELECTOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
172
PRESET BUTTONS
AM/FM
BUTTON
TUNE
BUTTONS
TUNE
BUTTONS
AUTO
SELECT
BUTTON
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SEEK
BUTTONS
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
UPPER DISPLAY
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK
BUTTONS
SCAN
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button (AM or FM
button on Canadian, Alaskan and
Hawaiian models). You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
upper display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
Use the TUNE button to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the button to tune to a
higher frequency, or the button
to tune to a lower frequency. To tune
with the interface dial, push the
selector down, and turn the knob to
TUNE. Then press ENTER on the
selector, and turn the knob to the
desired frequency. To exit the
TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
selector.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: the
preset buttons, and .
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Press the AUDIO button to view the
audio control display. Turn the
system on by pressing the power/
volume knob or the AM/FM button
(AMorFMbuttononCanadian,
AlaskanandHawaiianmodels).
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
CONTINUED
TUNETo Play the AM/FM Radio
To Select a Station
TUNE,SEEK,SCAN,
AUTO SELECT
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
173
STEREO ICON
TUNE ICON
BAND
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
−
−The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or SEEK button,
then release it. You can also activate
SEEK by pushing the interface
selector to the right or left.
The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it.
To scan with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and then push it
to the right. You will see SCAN
flashing on the screen.
Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
onAMandtwofrequenciesonFM.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
press the scan button again, or push
the interface selector to the right
again.
Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button (icon).
4.
1.
2.
3.
To store a preset memory location:
SEEK
SCAN
Preset
Playing the AM/FM Radio
174
SCAN ICON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Push the interface selector down to
scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
AUTO SEL on the screen, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds.
Press the A.SEL button. You will see
AUTO SEL on the screen, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. The system stores
the frequencies of six AM and
twelve FM stations in the preset
buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
To turn off auto select, press
ENTER on the interface selector
(press the A.SEL button) again. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
U.S. models (except Alaskan and
Hawaiian)
Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian
models
AUTO SELECT
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
175
AUTO SEL ICON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception
176
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
177
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.
Selectthemodeyouwanttoadjust
by pushing the interface selector up
or down, or by turning the interface
knob.
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the AudioPilot
and
Centerpoint
features (when playing
a CD-DA) to on or off.
Adjusting the Sound
178
SOUND ICON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−− −To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
andpressENTERontheinterface
selector. The current setting is
shownonthedisplay.Turnthe
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
To
adjust the strength of the sound
from the center or subwoofer
speaker, select it and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER
Adjusting the Sound
Features
179
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−−
To set this feature on or off, select
AudioPilot,andpressENTERonthe
interface selector. Turn the interface
knob to ON or OFF, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
TheONorOFFindicatorisshown
on the screen.
Bose AudioPilot
digital processing monitors sound
within the cabin, and helps
compensate for unwanted ambient
noise with no perceived change in
audio volume.
Bose Centerpoint
signal processing processes stereo
and matrix surround recordings to
five independent channels, delivering
a multi-channel surround sound
experience, even from conventional
stereo discs.
To set this feature on or off, select
Centerpoint, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The ON or OFF indicator is
shownonthedisplay.
Centerpoint
is only available
when listening to a CD (CD-DA).
AudioPilot
and Centerpoint are
registered trade marks of the Bose
corporation.
Adjusting the Sound
AudioPilot Centerpoint
180
NOTE:
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
181
PRESET BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
DISPLAY/
MODE
BUTTON
SATELLITE RADIO BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BUTTONS
TUNE
BUTTONS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, except Hawaii and
Alaska.
XM
is a registered trade mark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes. The
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is
displayed on the screen.
In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
Push the AUDIO button to display
XM information on the screen.
To change categories, press the
CATEGORY button, or push the
interface selector left or right.
XM Satellite Radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to
view channel and category selections
in the audio display.
You may experience periods when
XM Satellite Radio does not transmit
the artist’s name and or the song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
To listen to XM Satellite Radio, turn
the ignition switch to ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II). Push the power/
volume knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the button.
The last channel you listened to will
show in the display. Adjust the
volume by turning the power/
volume knob.
MODE
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
182
MODE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−To change channels, press the
TUNE button, or scroll down with
the interface selector, select TUNE,
andpressENTERontheselector.
Then turn the interface knob to the
desired channel. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
SCAN, press the SCAN button. To
scan with the interface dial, scroll
down, and push interface selector to
the right. You will see SCAN on the
screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, push the
interface selector to the right again.
CONTINUED
SCAN
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
183
TUNE ICON
SCAN ICON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
− Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the button or scroll
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.
Use the TUNE or SCAN function
to tune to a desired channel.
In the category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In the channel mode, all channels
can be selected.
Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Press the button or scroll
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button to
tune to it.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Preset
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
184
XM
BAND
MODE INDICATION
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
185
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
POWER/VOLUME knob to turn on
the audio system, and press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
andyou’llbeabletolistentoXM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
Satellite Radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Receiving XM Satellite Radio
Service
186
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
CONTINUED
Playing Discs
Features
187
EJECT
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
INTERFACE DIAL
INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian) Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models
SKIP
BUTTONS
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SKIP
BUTTONS
DISC
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE
BUTTONS
DISC
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
TUNE
BUTTONS
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer with the same
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The disc changer can play these disc
formats:
CD (CD-DA)
CD-R/RW
DVD-A
DTS
The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.
DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
verification standards may not be
playable.
The changer cannot play DVD-V or
DVD-R/RW formats.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’
are registered trademark of Digital
Theater System, Inc.
The changer can also play MP3 or
WMA formats (see page ).
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
193
Playing Discs
188
TM
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
With the ignition in ACCESSORY
(I)orON(II),pressandholdthe
LOAD button until you hear a
beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper
display, then release the button.
Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it
only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
upper display again, insert the
next disc into the slot.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last disc loaded.
To load a single disc:
Press and release the LOAD
button.
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 15 seconds, stop the load
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen
foranemptypositioninthe
changer. When the green load
indicator comes on and you see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,
insert the disc into the slot. Insert
it only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way.
You can select the position to load a
disc. Turn the interface knob to
select the position, then press
ENTER on the selector. This starts
the loading sequence. If you do not
select the position, the system loads
the disc to the first empty position in
numerical order.
If you press the LOAD button while
a disc is playing, the system will stop
playing that disc and start the
loading sequence. It will then play
the disc just loaded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Loading Discs in the Changer
Playing Discs
Features
189
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Select the changer by pressing the
DISC button. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
disc changer. You will see the
current disc position highlighted.
To select a different disc, press the
corresponding number on the preset
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Each time you press and release the
button or push the interface
selector to the right, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release the
button or push the interface
selector to the left to skip backward
to the beginning of the current track.
Press the button or push the
interface selector to the left again to
skip to the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe / or /
button. You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. Press ENTER on
the interface selector, and the track
list screen will be shown. If there are
no track names, track numbers are
displayed. You will see the current
track is highlighted. Turn the
interface knob to select the desired
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Since album and track names are not
included in most commercially
recorded CDs, you will not see that
information on the audio screen
when you play them. Normally,
album and track names are displayed
only by CDs recorded on a personal
computer, MP3 discs, and WMA
discs.
ToPlayaDisc ToChangeTracks ToChooseaTrack
Playing Discs
190
NOTE:
CURRENT DISC
CURRENT TRACK
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To exit the track list display, press
the AUDIO button, or push the
interface selector to the left.
When you press the SCAN button or
scroll down and push the interface
selector to the left, the first track of
the current disc plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
TRACK on the screen. To hear the
rest of the track, press the SCAN
button or push the interface selector
to the left again within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next track, plays about 10
seconds of it, and continues through
the rest of the tracks the same way.
WhenyoupressandholdtheSCAN
button until you hear a beep or scroll
down and push the interface selector
to the right, the first track of the
current disc plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
DISC on the screen. To hear the rest
of the disc, press the SCAN button
or push the interface selector to the
right again within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
of it, and continues through the rest
of the discs the same way. When the
system reaches the last disc, DISC
SCAN is canceled, and the disc plays
normally.
Playing Discs
Track Scan
Disc Scan
Features
191
SCAN ICON
SCAN ICON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To replay the current track
continuously, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER
on the interface selector. As a
reminder, you will see REPEAT next
to TRACK on the screen. To turn
this feature off, highlight TRACK
REPEAT (if not already highlighted),
andpressENTERontheinterface
selector again.
To replay the current disc
continuously, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select DISC
REPEAT, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see REPEAT next to DISC
on the screen. To turn this feature
off, highlight DISC REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.
To play the tracks of the current disc
in random order, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK RANDOM, and press
ENTER on the interface selector. As
a reminder, you will see RANDOM
next to TRACK on the screen. To
turn this feature off, highlight
TRACK RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.
Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play
Playing Discs
192
REPEAT ICON
REPEAT ICON
RANDOM ICON
TRACK REPEAT ICON
DISC REPEAT ICON
TRACK RANDOM ICON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The changer plays MP3 discs in
recorded order. Maximum playable
file layers are 8, and total playable
tracks are 255. If your disc has a
complex structure, the changer
takessometimetoreadthedisc
before beginning play.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
To play an MP3 disc, use the disc
controls previously described, along
with the following information.
Use the disc controls previously
described.
To take the system out of disc mode,
press the AM/FM button (AM or
FM button on Canadian, Alaskan,
and Hawaiian models) or press the
button (U.S. models). To
return to disc mode, press the DISC
button.
To enter the FOLDER LIST, press
ENTER on the selector, select a
folder by turning the interface knob,
then press ENTER on the selector. If
youwanttomovetotheparent
folder, push the selector up. If there
are no folder names, ‘‘No Title’’ is
displayed. You will see the current
folder highlighted.
To Stop Playing a Disc
Playing a DVD-A Disc
Playing an MP3 Disc
Playing Discs
Features
193
CURRENT FOLDER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To replay the current folder
continuously, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
FOLDER REPEAT with the
interface knob, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see FOLDER REPEAT next
to the disc number on the screen. To
turn this feature off, highlight
FOLDER REPEAT (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the selector again.
To play the tracks of the current
folder in random order, use the
interface selector to scroll down,
select FOLDER RANDOM with the
interface knob, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see FOLDER RANDOM
next to the disc number on the
screen. To turn this feature off,
highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the selector again.
Folder RandomFolder Repeat
Playing Discs
194
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
FORDER REPEAT ICON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitbypressing
the corresponding number on the
preset button or turning the
interface knob, and pressing ENTER
on the interface selector. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off:
When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the upper display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system automatically enters
the previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2,
or XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models
except Alaskan and Hawaiian)]. The
system also begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc. If you do not load another disc,
the load sequence is cancelled, and
the system continues playing in the
previous mode.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 15 seconds and put the
disc changer in pause mode. To
begin playing the disc, press the disc
button.
Removing Discs from the
Changer
Playing Discs
Features
195
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythedisc
changer.
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
tip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 mm) discs. Smaller or odd-
shaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
196
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Error Message Cause Solution
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
orthedisc(s)cannotberemoved,consultyour
dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be remove, consult your
dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Disc Changer Error Messages
Features
197
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
▲▼
＋
−
＋
−
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the upper display.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models
except Alaskan and Hawaiian), or a
disc (if a disc is loaded).
Remote Audio Controls
Remote Audio Controls
198
MODE
BUTTON
CH
BUTTON
VOL
BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
youwillsee‘‘ ’’intheupper
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code. The code is
locatedontheradiocodecard
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
Ifthecodecardislost,yourdealer
can access your code with your
radio’s serial number. To access the
serial number, turn the radio on. It
must display ‘‘ ’’, then turn
the radio off. Push and hold the
preset 1 and preset 6 buttons, then
push the POWER/VOLUME knob.
The serial number will appear in two
sets of four digits.
The system will retain your A/M and
F/M presets even if power is
disconnected.
Radio Theft Protection
Features
199
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
monitor on the instrument panel (see
page ) to see if the doors and
trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, position/side marker
lights, and taillights flash if someone
attempts to break into your vehicle
or remove the radio. This alarm
continues for 2 minutes, then the
system resets. To reset an alarming
system before the 2 minutes have
elapsed, unlock either front door
with the remote or the built-in key.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
without triggering the alarm. The
alarm will sound if the trunk lock is
forced, or the trunk is opened with
the trunk release button on the
driver’s door or the emergency trunk
opener.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door or the hood
without using the built-in key or the
remote will cause it to sound. It also
sounds if the radio is removed from
the dashboard or the audio system
wiring is cut.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, close the hood, and close the
trunk. For the system to activate,
you must lock the doors from the
outside with the remote, built-in key,
lock tab, or door lock switch. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
13
Security System
200
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Press and release the DECEL/
SET button on the steering wheel.
The CRUISE CONTROL icon
appears on the multi-information
display to show the system is now
activated.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
When cruise control is on while
driving, the SH-AWD torque
distribution monitor and the tire
pressure monitor are not shown
on the multi-information display.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control
Features
201
RES/
ACCEL
BUTTON
DECEL/SET BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, and press the DECEL/SET
button.
Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This cancels cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISECONTROLicononthe
multi-information display will come
back on.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle speeds up about 1
mph (1.6 km/h).
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle slows down about 1
mph (1.6 km/h).
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
202
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Even with cruise control on, you can
still use the accelerator pedal to
speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CRUISE button.
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
thesamespeedasbefore.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
203
CANCEL BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and
reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote control
transmitter for the device (garage
door, automatic gate, security
system, etc.) has a fresh battery.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls .
The HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
The HomeLink transceiver stores
the code in a permanent memory.
There should be no need to retrain
the transmitter if your vehicle’s
battery goes dead or is disconnected.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it.
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
Todothis,pressandholdthefront
and rear buttons on HomeLink for
about 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes. Release the
buttons,thengotostep1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Training HomeLink
Important Safety Precautions
General Inf ormation
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
204
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
CONTINUED
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote 2 to 5 inches from
HomeLink.Makesureyouarenot
blocking your view of the red
indicator in HomeLink.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1
second.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter.
Go ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page ).
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
PushandholdtheHomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
2.
3.
4.
1.
5.
6.
206
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
205
RED
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on, then release it. The indicator
may blink, or come on and stay on.
You then have about 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Press and hold the button
programmed during the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure for 3 to 4
seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
Press the programmed HomeLink
button again. It should operate the
garage door.The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener. 6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
7.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training With a Rolling Code
System
206
TRAINING BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the front and
rear buttons until the red indicator
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by the
transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to www.homelink.
com.
1.
2.
205
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
207
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
AcuraLink enhances your ownership
experience by providing a direct
communication link between your
vehicleandtheAcuraServer.
Working through the XM radio
satellite, AcuraLink works in
conjunction with the navigation
system, HandsFreeLink (HFL), and
audio system in your vehicle. It
displays and receives several kinds
of messages, including:
Operating tips and information on
your vehicle’s features.
Important recall and safety
information.
Maintenance information to keep
your vehicle in top condition.
Diagnostic information to provide
information about any problems
with your vehicle.
Most AcuraLink functions are
controlled by the interface dial. The
interface dial has two parts, a knob
and a selector.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER)togotothatselection.
Interface Dial
AcuraLink
208
ENTER
SELECTOR
KNOB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If you have a new message, an
envelope icon appears in the top
right corner of the navigation screen.
To open a message:
Press ENTER on the interface
selector, then select New Message
from the navigation system map
menu. If there is more than one
new message, you will see a list of
message titles.
Unread messages have a closed
envelope icon next to them. The icon
disappears when it has already been
read.
Only diagnostic info
messages appear while driving. They
indicate if your vehicle has a
problem that may need immediate
attention (see page ).
After purchasing your vehicle,
messages may not appear
immediately.
Your dealer has to register the
vehicle identification before you can
receive messages. This can take
several days to process.
Select Message to display the
Select a message category screen.
Then, select ALL MESSAGES.
Scroll up or down, and select the
message you want to read by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector.
To view previously read messages,
press the INFO button, then select
MESSAGES.
215
Reading Messages
AcuraLink
Features
209
NOTE:
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Diagnostic info and recall/
campaign messages can only be
deleted by your dealer.
To delete a single message:
Press the INFO button to bring up
the Information screen.
Scroll to the Messages option,
then select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
Usetheinterfaceknobtoscrollup
or down to the message title you
want to delete, and select it by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface
knob, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
When you open a message, you can
read a summary of it, and then
choose one of several options. If an
option is not available for a message,
that button will not be highlighted.
Scroll to the category with the
messages you want to delete, and
selectthecategorybypressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to the Delete Messages
option, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Usetheinterfaceknobtoscrollto
the AcuraLink/Messages button,
and select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
Select MORE by pushing the
interface selector to the right.
Press the SETUP button to view
the setup screen.
The Delete All Messages
command only works for quick tip
and maintenance minder messages.
Other messages must be deleted
individually.
To delete all messages:
AcuraLink
Deleting Messages Message Options
210
NOTE: NOTE:
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
To set your AcuraLink preferences
(thetypesofmessagesyouwantto
receive, if any), visit the Owner Link
website at
www.owners.acura.com
,
and choose what you would like to
receive. If you do not have internet
access, call Acura Client Services at
(800) 382-2238; they can set your
message preferences for you.
Select this button to
delete the current message.
Select this button to hear a
voice read the entire message. This
gives you more information than the
screen can display at one time. When
you select the Voice button, it
changes to a Stop Reading button.
Select the button again to stop the
voice.
Select this button to call a
phone number embedded in the
message. When you select , the
HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the
number for you.
To make a call, your Bluetooth
compatible phone must be paired to
your vehicle’s HandsFreeLink (see
page ).
Select this button to find the nearest
Acura dealer using the navigation
system.
Select
this button to call the Acura dealer
you purchased your vehicle from.
AcuraLink also directs you to this
dealer so you can schedule a
maintenance appointment or receive
information about a message. If you
visit another dealer for service two
times within a 14-month period,
AcuraLink will reset to call that
dealer.
Select this button to
get more information about the
current diagnostic message. To use
this option, your cell phone must be
linked to the HFL and have a
compatible data service available.
Access the Owner Link website to
find out which data services are
currently compatible with AcuraLink.
235
AcuraLink
Message PreferencesDelete
Voice
Call
Call
Find Nearest Acura Dealer
Call Your Acura Dealer
More Info
Features
211
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
−
−
−
Select
this button to begin the process
required to connect to Acura. This is
used to access the most recent
diagnostic information when a
problem occurs.
Select ON to have
the system automatically read each
message to you. Select OFF to
manually select the Voice button
when you want a message read to
you.
To access the following functions,
press the SETUP button, push the
interface dial to the right to select
MORE, then rotate the interface dial
to select AcuraLink/Messages.
Select this
button to delete all stored messages
within a category, except for
diagnostic info and recall campaign
messages. These messages can only
be deleted by a certified technician
after the recall or problem is done or
corrected, or through a broadcast
message from Acura.
Select ON if you want to be notified
of new messages (envelope icon
appears on the navigation screen).
Select OFF if you do not want to be
notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the
navigation screen).
For the Phone Data
Connection button to be active, you
need a Bluetooth compatible and
enabled cell phone paired to the
HandsFreeLink (HFL), and a
compatible data service (see
on page ).235
AcuraLink
AcuraLink/Message Screen
Phone-Data Connection
Auto Reading
Delete Messages
New Message Notification
Pairing
Your Phone
212
NOTE:
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
During the first 90 days of
ownership, one of 32 different
messages appears each day. These
messages help you to use and
understand the technological
features of your vehicle.
These messages, based on updated
vehicle information and comments
from other RL owners, supplement
your Owner’s Manual and Quick
Start Guide. They provide you with
relevant information for a safe and
enjoyable ownership experience. For
additional information, call Acura
Client Services directly through the
HFL.
There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Guides, Maintenance Minders,
Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
and Dealer Appointment Reminders.
The system can store up to 256
messages.
Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.
AcuraLink
Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories
Features
213
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If your vehicle is affected by a recall
or other important safety
information, a letter will be mailed to
you about the issue and how to fix it.
If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,
you will also receive a reminder
message through AcuraLink. You
can then use the message options to
call your dealer for an appointment
or to find the nearest dealer.
You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.
These messages provide detailed
information about the service
needed for your vehicle. When a
maintenance message appears on
the multi-information display, a list of
needed maintenance items also
appearsinanAcuraLinkmessage.
These messages tell you the exact
maintenance needed, helping you to
avoid unnecessary maintenance
costs.
AcuraLink
Recall/CampaignsMaintenance Minder
214
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Depending on the severity of the
problem, the message will let you
know if you should see your dealer
immediately or if you can wait a
while.
You will see information from the
onboard troubleshooting database.
You can then use message options to
call your dealer for an appointment,
find the nearest dealer, or find out
more information about the issue.
When an instrument panel indicator
comes on, AcuraLink immediately
notifies you with the message,
‘‘Check more information.’’ If you do
not want the information right away,
select the Check Later option. If you
want the information now, select the
Check Now option. (If the navigation
screen is not active, you must select
OK from the navigation disclaimer
screen before you can check the
information.)
If an instrument panel indicator stays
on when it should go off, or a
message appears on the multi-
information display, AcuraLink can
identify the problem, send the
information to Acura for analysis,
andthenprovideyouwiththemost
accurate repair information available-
all before going to a dealer. This
helps you handle the problem as it
occurs, preventing or limiting costly
repairs.
A diagnostic message is generated if
any of the instrument panel
indicators stay on when they should
go off. For more information on the
instrument panel indicators, see page
.
The AcuraLink system cannot
determinesomemechanical
problems (such as squeaks or
rattles) that are not triggered by the
diagnostic indicator monitors.
59
CONTINUED
AcuraLink
Diagnostic Info
Features
215
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
When you make an appointment
through the Owner’s Link Online
Scheduling Service, you can be
reminded about that appointment
through the AcuraLink two days in
advance. If you need to reschedule,
you can call your dealer directly with
the HFL.
The timing of your reminder is
based on your reminder preference
established on Owner Link.
When you select the More Info
option, if the HFL is connected to a
cellular data service, AcuraLink
gathers more information about the
problem, and sends it to Acura.
There, the information is analyzed
and returned to the vehicle with the
most accurate repair information.
AcuraLink
Dealer Appointment Reminder
216
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
U.S. models only
The OnStar system in your vehicle
gives you access to a wide range of
services and information with the
touch of a button. An OnStar advisor
is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week.
The Safe and Sound Plan provides
these features:
Roadside Assistance
Emergency Services
Automatic Notification of Airbag
Deployment
Accident Assistance
Remote Door Locking/Unlocking
Stolen Vehicle Tracking
Misplaced Vehicle Assistance
Online Concierge Services
The Directions and Connections
Plan provides these additional
features:
Route Support
Ride Assist
Information and Convenience
Services
The OnStar buttons and indicator
are located on the ceiling near the
front ceiling light.
OnStar
OnStar Control Panel
Features
217
VOICE
ACTIVATED
KEY PAD
BUTTON
SYSTEM
STATUS
INDICATOR
EMERGENCY
BUTTON
OnStar SERVICES
BUTTON
CALL ANSWER/
CALL END
(WHITE PHONE)
BUTTON
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To record a message:
You can record up to 5 minutes of
information from your OnStar
advisor or the virtual advisor. This is
helpful for reviewing the route, hotel,
or restaurant information you
receive from the OnStar center.
A microphone is located in the base
of the OnStar control panel so you
can speak to the advisor without
taking your hands off the steering
wheel or diverting your attention
from the road. The OnStar advisor’s
voice comes from the audio system’s
speakers. Use the volume control on
the audio system or on the steering
wheel to adjust the volume.
Depending on which service you
request, you may need to give your
Personal Identification Number
(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is a
number you make up and provide
when you establish your OnStar
service.
If cellular telephone service is not
available in the area you are driving
in, you will hear a fast busy signal.
The system will retry the connection
several times before returning to the
ready mode.
Press this button to contact an
OnStar advisor. You will hear a
chime, followed by the
announcement, ‘‘Connecting to
OnStar.’’ The connection should take
about 15 seconds. The advisor will
assist you with any of the services
included in your plan.
To cancel the retry, press the white
phone button. During your call to the advisor or
virtual advisor, press and release
the OnStar button. The system
beeps to indicate that it is
recording.
When you are finished recording,
press and release the OnStar
button again. The system beeps
and stops recording.
When you are finished listening,
press the white phone button. The
system responds with ‘‘Goodbye.’’
Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ The
recorded message is played
through the audio system
speakers.
Press the white phone button. The
system responds with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
To hear the first playback of a
message:
OnStar
OnStar Services Button
Recording an Advisor or Virtual
Advisor Message
218
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Press this button to send dial tones
while communicating with an
automated phone system during an
OnStar personal call (see page ).
The advisor will ask about the nature
of the emergency, locate your
vehicle, and notify the appropriate
emergency service agencies.
If you press this button accidentally,
do not cancel the call. Wait until the
OnStar advisor answers, then explain
your mistake.
Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ The
system responds with ‘‘Play or
Resume.’’
If you say ‘‘Play,’’ the message
plays from the beginning. If you
say ‘‘Resume,’’ the message plays
from the point you previously
stopped it.
To hear a message again:
Press this button to contact an
OnStar advisor only if you have an
emergency situation. You will hear a
tone, followed by the announcement,
‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’
Your call is given highest priority.
Press the white phone button. The
system responds with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Recording a new message will delete
the previous message.
Press this white phone button to end
a call to the OnStar advisor. If the
OnStar center calls you, press this
button to answer the call.
This button is also used to initiate
the Personal Calling and Virtual
Advisor services, if you have
subscribed.
224
OnStar
Emergency Button
Voice Activated Keypad
Button
Call Answer/Call End
Button
Features
219
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
If you are ever in an
accident that causes the airbags to
deploy, the OnStar system
automatically places a call (provided
the OnStar system and your vehicle’s
electrical system are still intact). The
advisor will attempt to speak to you
to evaluate the situation, and contact
the nearest emergency services
provider.
The OnStar system uses the global
positioning system (GPS) to locate
your vehicle whenever you place a
call. This allows the advisor to
quickly contact the nearest services
without requiring you to provide
detailed directions.
Contact
the OnStar advisor if you need
assistance with a problem (flat tire,
out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. The
advisor will contact an appropriate
agency to come and assist you.
Contact an
OnStar advisor if you have an
emergency situation. The advisor
will contact the nearest emergency
services provider (ambulance, fire
department, etc.) and advise them of
your situation.
This indicator shows you the status
of the system.
The system is ready
for use.
Acallisin
progress.
There is a problem
with the system. Press the OnStar
button to contact an advisor. If the
call connects, the advisor will assist
you with verifying the system’s
operation. If you are not able to
contact an advisor, take your vehicle
to an Acura dealer to have the
system diagnosed.
There is a problem
with the system while a call is in
progress.
The
OnStar advisor can help you if you
are ever in a minor accident by
asking you for information about the
accident. Complete, detailed
information will make it easier to
complete accident reports and
insurance claims.
OnStar
Automatic Notification of Airbag
Deployment
Safe and Sound Plan Features
Roadside Assistance
Emergency Services
System Status Indicator
Solid Green
Blinking Green
Solid Red
Blinking Red
Accident Assistance
220
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The OnStar
advisor can give you verbal
directions from your current location
to a desired destination.
If you need a ride
(taxi, limousine service, etc.) the
OnStar advisor can make the
arrangements for you. Use the
OnStar button, or call
(888) 4-ONSTAR.
If you are unable to locate your
vehicleinalargeparkinglotor
parking structure, contact OnStar at
(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will
remotely activate the exterior lights
and the horn, allowing you to locate
your vehicle.
From your computer, you can log
into www. myonstar.com to make
dinner reservations, purchase tickets
to events, send flowers, etc.
Using
GPS, OnStar can locate your vehicle
almost anywhere. If your vehicle is
ever stolen, contact OnStar at
(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will
put you in contact with the proper
authorities, and assist them with
locating your vehicle.
By sending a signal to your
vehicle, the advisor can lock or
unlock your vehicle’s doors. This is
helpfulifyouareawayfromyour
vehicle and realize you forgot to lock
the doors, or if you have locked the
remote or built-in key in your vehicle.
To get OnStar’s assistance, call
(888) 4-ONSTAR (466-7827).
The Directions and Connections
Plan provides these additional
features:
The OnStar advisor can
give you information on nearby
hotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,
gas stations, and many other
services in any area you are traveling.
The advisor can also help you with
hotel or restaurant reservations.
OnStar
Directions and Connections Plan
Features
Route Support
Ride Assist
Misplaced Vehicle Assistance
Online Concierge Services
Stolen Vehicle Tracking
Remote Door Locking/Unlocking
Information and Convenience
Services
Features
221
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
The OnStar Personal Calling plan is
an extra-cost option that gives you
the ability to use your vehicle’s
OnStar system as a hands-free
cellular telephone.
To sign up for Personal Calling,
press the OnStar button in your
vehicle, and notify the advisor that
you’d like to sign up. The advisor will
get all the information needed to set
up your account, and provide you
with your new cellular telephone
number.
You will need to provide a credit card
number, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ or
minutes of air time (one unit equals
1 minute).
You
must use voice commands to give
the OnStar system your calling
information. To make a phone call:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Dial.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phone
number to dial, please.’’
Say the entire number without
pausing.
OnStar will repeat the number.
Say ‘‘Yes’’ to dial the number, or
say ‘‘No’’ to try again.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’
andthenrepeatthecomplete
telephone number. It will then
place the telephone call.
When you have finished your
conversation, press the white
phone button to hang up.
If you make a mistake speaking the
phone number, or the system
responds with the wrong number,
say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the
system to erase the number.
OnStar
Personal Calling Placing a Telephone Call
222
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
−
You can also enter the number one
digit at a time. To make a phone call:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Digit dial.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First
digit to dial, please.’’
Say the first digit of the number.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Always wait for OnStar to confirm
the digit before going to the next
digit.
Say the second digit of the number.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Continue this until you have given
OnStar the complete telephone
number. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’
andthenrepeatthecomplete
telephone number. It will then
place the telephone call.
When you have finished your
conversation, press the white
phone button again to hang up.
If you make a mistake speaking a
digit of the phone number, or the
system responds with the wrong
digit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the
system to erase the last digit.
If you need to cancel the phone call
attempt before entering the
complete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’
The system will cancel the operation
and return to Ready.
If the system has difficulty
understanding a voice command, it
canrespondwith:
‘‘Pardon’’ The system could not
match your voice command to one it
knows. Repeat the command
distinctly.
‘‘Slower please’’ The system
missed the command because it was
not ready for it, or there was too
much background noise. Repeat the
command after a short pause.
OnStar
Features
223
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−−This
feature allows you to access most
voicemail systems and respond to
number requests from computer
systems, such as ‘‘Press 1 for sales;
press 2 for service.’’ To use the voice
activated keypad during a call, do
this:
While in a personal call, press the
Voice Activated Key Pad ( )
button.
When someone places a telephone
call to you, the audio system will
mute and you will hear the ring.
Press the white phone button to
answer the call. When you have
completed the call, press the white
phone button again to hang up.
The OnStar system can store up to
twenty 32-digit telephone numbers in
its memory. When you store these
numbers in its memory, you give
each one a name tag. When you want
to place a telephone call, you can
recall the number by giving the
system the name tag.
Continue this until you have given
OnStar the complete number.
Then say ‘‘Send.’’ OnStar will send
the number by dial tones.
Say the second digit of the number.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Always wait for OnStar to confirm
the digit before going to the next
digit.
Say the first digit of the number
you want to send.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First
digit to send please.’’
OnStar
Voice Activated Key Pad Incoming Telephone Calls Using Name Tags
224
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
− You can also store a telephone
number and its name tag one digit at
a time. To store them in the system:
To store a
telephone number and its name tag
in the system, do this:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Store.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phone
number to store, please.’’
Say the entire number.
OnStar will repeat the number,
andthensay‘‘YesorNo.’’
Say ‘‘Yes,’’ or say ‘‘No’’ to try again.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name
tag, please.’’
Say the name that you want
assigned to that telephone number.
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘ready.’’
Say ‘‘Digit store.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First
digit to store, please.’’
Say the first digit of the number.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Say the second digit of the number.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Continue this until you have given
OnStar the complete telephone
number. Then say ‘‘Store.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name
tag, please.’’
Say the name that you want
assigned to that telephone number.
OnStar
Storing a Name Tag
Features
225
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
＜＞
＜＞
−
−
＜＞
−
Press the Call Answer or Call End
button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Delete.’’
Say ‘‘Yes.’’
Say the name tag for the number
you want to delete.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete
name tag , yes or no.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting
name tag .’’
To redial
the last telephone number you
called:
Press the Call Answer or Call End
button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Redial.’’
OnStar will respond with
‘‘Redialing,’’ then place the
telephone call.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name
tag, please.’’
To
place a telephone call using a name
tag, do this:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Call.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name
tag, please.’’
Say the name tag for the number
you want to call.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling
name tag ,’’ then place the
telephone call.
If you have forgotten what name
tags you have stored, the system will
read them to you. Press the white
phone button. When the system
responds with ‘‘OnStar ready,’’ say
‘‘Directory.’’ The system will then
repeat all stored name tags.
To delete
a name tag and telephone number
from memory, do this:
By giving the system a security code
that you make up, you can lock out
the personal calling and virtual
advisor capabilities of the system so
unauthorized people cannot make
telephone calls. To turn security on
or off, do this:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Security.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First
digit of security code, please.’’
Say the first digit of the code.
OnStar
Redialing a Number
Security Code
Placing a Telephone Call Deleting a Name Tag
226
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
＜＞
−OnStar will repeat that digit.
Say the second digit of the code.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Say the third digit of the code.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Say the fourth digit of the code.
If you forget the security code
entered, or someone else enters a
security code unknown to you, you
must contact an OnStar advisor to
reset the code. Press the OnStar
button, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.
You must prepurchase units
(minutes) of cellular air time. The
OnStar system tracks how many
units you have remaining.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Security
is ON/OFF.’’
To find out how many units you have
remaining, do this:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Units.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify
or add.’’
Say ‘‘Verify.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘You
have number units remaining.’’
To purchase more
units of cellular air time, do this:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘Units.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify
or add.’’
Say ‘‘Add.’’
OnStar will connect you to an
automated system to handle your
purchase.
It is also possible to press the
Onstar button and talk to an
advisor to purchase more air time.
You can also call OnStar at
(888) 4-ONSTAR, or get information
about your account at the OnStar
web site, www.onstar.com.
Keeping Track of Units Adding Units
OnStar
Features
227
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
When you subscribe to personal
calling, you can also enjoy the
benefits of virtual advisor. This
feature lets you hear information in
your vehicle about weather, sports,
news, and stocks. It is even possible
to have your e-mail read to you.
Although virtual advisor can provide
information on many subjects, you
can set up a customized profile with
OnStar that makes it easier to get
information about areas that are of
specific interest to you. To do this,
you must go to the OnStar web site,
www.onstar.com. This is a secure
site; you will need your account
number and PIN to access your
account information and to design
your customized profile.
If you do not have Internet access, a
default profile can be set up for you. You make up and provide your
personal identification number (PIN)
when you establish your account
with OnStar. You should write down
your PIN, and keep it with you at all
times.
You can change your PIN at any time.
Contact the OnStar advisor by
pressing the OnStar button, or by
calling (888) 4-ONSTAR.
If you forget your PIN, contact the
OnStar advisor. For security reasons,
your PIN will be mailed to you.
To use the virtual advisor from your
vehicle, do this:
Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
Say ‘‘virtual advisor.’’
The system will connect you to the
virtual advisor. The virtual advisor
will prompt you for the information
you desire.
If you would like to hear a list of
voice commands that are available,
say ‘‘What are my choices.’’ OnStar
is continually upgrading the system,
so new commands become available.
OnStar Virtual Advisor Personal Identification Number
OnStar
228
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
OnStar uses the global positioning
system (GPS) to locate your vehicle
for functions such as route guidance
and roadside assistance. GPS is
affected by structures that can
obstruct the signal, such as tunnels,
parking structures, and tall buildings.
It may not be possible for OnStar to
pinpoint your location if you are in or
near such structures.
OnStar uses cellular technology to
communicate with your vehicle.
Cellular coverage varies by location,
which may affect the ability to
establish a connection, or the quality
of the connection.
Onstar has antennas in the rear
window (on each side of the high-
mount brake light) and on the roof
near the high-mount brake light. To
avoid reception problems, do not
cover the window antennas with
metal stickers, and do not cover the
roof antenna with cargo or bicycles
on a roof rack.
When you turn off your vehicle’s
ignition, OnStar goes into low-power
mode. After 48 hours, it switches to
sleep mode to conserve your vehicle’s
battery power. Features such as
remote door unlocking and
misplaced vehicle assistance will not
work after your vehicle has been
parked for more than 48 hours.
OnStar
is a registered trademark of
the OnStar Corporation.
As required by the FCC: This device
complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
System Limitations
OnStar
Features
229
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Bluetooth is a registered trademark
of Bluetooh SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to the HFL.
TheHFLusesaClass3Bluetooth,
which means the maximum range
between your phone and vehicle is
30 feet (10 meters).
HFL recognizes simple voice
commands, such as phone numbers
and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
UsingVoiceControlonpage .
Here are the main features of the
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL
begin on page .
Your vehicle is equipped with the
HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses
Bluetooth technology as a wireless
link between it and your Bluetooth
compatible cell phone. When you are
in your vehicle and your phone is
linked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy
hands-free phone use. The HFL is
available in both English and French
(Canadian models only). To change
the language, see page . To use the HFL, your phone must
have approved Bluetooth capability
along with the Hands Free Profile.
This type of phone is available
through many phone makers and
cellular carriers. You can also find an
approved phone by visiting
In Canada, visit
With a linked phone, the HFL allows
you to send and receive calls in your
vehicle without holding the phone.
The HFL can store up to 50 names
and phone numbers in its phonebook.
Withalinkedphone,youcanthen
automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
Here are the main components of
the HFL system:
The HFL microphone is on the
ceiling console. The microphone is
shared with the navigation system.
233
233
244
www.acura.com. (
www.acura.ca.) or by calling the Hands
Free Link customer support at
(888) 528-7876.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Voice Control
Incoming/Outgoing Calls
Phonebook
Microphone
HandsFreeLink
230
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Here is the function of each HFL
button:
HFLTalk:Thisbuttonisusedbefore
you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.
HFLBack:Thisbuttonisusedto
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
cancel an operation.
To operate the HFL, use the HFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel. Below the
HFL buttons is another set of voice
control buttons for the navigation,
climate control, and audio systems.
When the HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle’s front
audio system speakers. If the audio
system is in use while making a call,
the HFL over-rides the audio system.
To change the volume level, use the
audio system volume knob.
HandsFreeLink
HFL ButtonsAudio System
Features
231
HFL TALK
BUTTON
HFL BACK
BUTTON
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
＊
Signal Strength Indicates the
network signal strength of the
current phone call. Five bars
equals full strength.
ROAM Status Indicates your
phone is roaming.
Battery Level Status Indicates
the power remaining in your
phone’s current battery charge.
Five bars equals full battery
strength.
HFL Mode Indicates when you
are dialing and receiving calls.
Phone Dialing Indicates the
number you entered or the
number of the incoming call.
Some phones do not send this
information to the HFL.
When you are operating the HFL, or
when you manually select HFL on
the multi-information display, you
will see this information on the
screen:
:
HandsFreeLink
Multi-Inf ormation Display
232
SIGNAL
STRENGTH
BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS
HFL
MODE
ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
TheHFLisoperatedbytheHFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel. The next
few pages provide instructions for all
basic features of the HFL.
To hear a list of available options
at any time, press the Talk button,
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
free link help.’’
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
To enter a string of numbers in a
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
10, or 11.
To skip a voice prompt, press the
Talk button while the HFL is
speaking. The HFL will then begin
listening for your next command.
Here are some guidelines for using
voice control:
To enter a command, press the
Talk button. Then, after the beep,
say your command in a clear,
natural tone.
For best system operation, set the
climate control fan speed to low,
and direct the center vents away
from the microphone in the ceiling.
If the HFL does not recognize a
command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
command a second time, its
response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
doesn’t recognize the command a
third time, it plays the Help
prompt.
All phones may not
operate identically, and some may
cause inconsistent operation of the
HFL.
How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control
HandsFreeLink
Features
233
NOTE:
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To go back one step in a command
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press
the Back button.
When you finish a command
sequence, the HFL goes back to
its main menu. For example, when
you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the
HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been
stored.’’ The next time you press
the Talk button, you will be at the
main menu.
If nothing is said while the HFL is
listening for a command, the HFL
will time out and stop its voice
recognition. The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins listening from the point at
which it timed out.
To end a command sequence at
any time, press and hold the Back
button, or press the Talk button,
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’
ThenexttimeyoupresstheTalk
button, the HFL begins from its
main menu.
The voice of the HFL can be set to
male or female (U.S. models only).
Also, the incoming notification can
be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
notification.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
male or female prompts?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the
system voice you want. The HFL
response is, ‘‘Male (Female)
prompts have been selected.
Would you like an audible
notification of an incoming call?’’
1.
2.
3.
To set up the system, do this:
HandsFreeLink
Setting Up the System
234
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
CONTINUED
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
a ring tone or a prompt?’’ If you
say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFL
returns to its main menu. Saying
‘‘No’’ will result in no ring tone or
prompt playback during an
incoming call. The audio system
will still mute, and a message will
be displayed.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or
‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ring
tone’’ you will hear a ring tone
through the audio speakers to
announce an incoming call. If you
choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hear
this message to announce an
incoming call: ‘‘You have an
incoming call.’’
Your Bluetooth compatible phone
with HandsFree Profile must be
paired to the HFL before you can
make and receive hands-free call.
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
For pairing, your phone must be in
its Discovery mode.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair
your phone to the HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
operating manual, talk to your
phone retailer, or call the
HandsFreeLink customer support
at (888) 528-7876.
During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones
before pairing a new phone.
4.
5.
HandsFreeLink
Pairing Your Phone
Features
235
NOTE:
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Phone set up options
are status, pair, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The pairing
process requires operation of your
mobile phone. For safety, only
perform this function while the
vehicle is stopped. State a four-
digit code for pairing. Note this
code. It will be requested by the
phone.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
code you want to use. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFLresponse
is,‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthiscorrect?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Searching for a
Bluetooth phone.’’
Steps 5 and 6 show a
common way to get your phone into
its Discovery mode. If these steps do
not work on your phone, refer to the
phone’s operating manual.
Follow the prompts on your phone
to get it into its Search mode. The
phone will search for the HFL.
When it comes up, select
HandsFreeLink from the list of
options displayed on your phone.
When asked by the phone, enter
the four-digit code from step 3 into
your phone. The HFL response is
‘‘A new phone has been found.
What would you like to name this
phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to use. For example, say
‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
successfully paired. Returning to
the main menu.’’
If you want to pair another phone,
repeat steps 1 through 7.
Once the paring process is
completed, AcuraLink may display a
connection confirmation screen. This
screen is used to create a data
connection between your cell phone
and the AcuraLink system. You can
choose to setup the data connection
now, or do it later. If you want to do
it now, exit the HFL menu by
pressing the HFL Back button one
or more times.
1. 4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
3.
8.
HandsFreeLink
236
NOTE:
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Which phone
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to rename.
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
new name for Eric’s phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to delete. For
example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
to delete Eric’s phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
delete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to
continue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’
or ‘‘Cancel.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
deleted.
2.
3.
4.
1. 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
HandsFreeLink
Features
237
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone being
used, do this:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
for the next phone.’’ The HFL
then disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone. If no other phones are
found, the first phone remains
linked.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all
phones paired to the system have
been read, the HFL response is
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An
example of the HFL response is,
‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
strength is three bars. Signal
strength is five bars, and the
phone is roaming. Returning to the
main menu.’’
2.
1.
1.
2.
1.
HandsFreeLink
238
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.
You can make calls using any phone
number, or by using a name in the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial
the last number called. During a call,
theHFLallowsyoutotalkupto30
minutes after you remove the key
from the ignition switch.
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to call. For example, say
‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or
continue to add numbers.’’
To end the call, press the Back
button.
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to call. For example, say
‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.
To end the call, press the Back
button.
To redial the last number called by
the phone, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.
1.
3.
3.
1.
2.
2.
4.
4.
To make a call using a phone number,
do this:
To make a call using a name in the HFL
phonebook, do this:
Making a Call
HandsFreeLink
Features
239
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If you receive a call when you are not
on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
audio system (if it is on), and plays
the incoming call notification, if
activated. To answer the call, press
the Talk button and begin speaking.
If you don’t want to answer the call,
press the Back button.
The HFL allow you to send numbers
or names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system. You can also program
account numbers into the HFL
phonebook for easy retrieval during
menu-driven calls.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3.’’TheHFLresponseis
‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to
add numbers.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to send. For example, say
‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Would you like to
send account number?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.
If your phone has Call Waiting, and
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the
Talk button to answer it. When you
do this, the original call is placed on
hold. To return to the original call,
press the Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the new call,
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.
1.
2.1.
2.
3.
3.
To send a number during a call, do this:
To send a name during a call, do this:
Receiving a CallSending Numbers or Names
During a Call
HandsFreeLink
240
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
During a call, you can transfer it
from the HFL to your phone, or from
your phone to the HFL.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’
The audio switches from the HFL
to the phone.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’
The audio switches from your
phone to the HFL.
During a call, you can mute or
unmute your voice to the person you
are talking to.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is
cancelled.’’
The HFL phonebook can store up
to 50 names with their associated
numbers. These can be any types
of numbers. For example, you can
store a phone number and use it to
make a call, or you can store an
account number and use it during
a call to a menu-driven phone
system.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to store?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
number for account number?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
7891.’’
2.
3.
1.
1.
2.
4.
2.
1.
To transfer a call from the HFL to your
phone, do this:
To transfer a call from your phone to the
HFL, do this:
To mute your voice, do this:
To unmute your voice, do this:
To add a name, do this:
CONTINUED
Transferring a Call
Muting a Call
Setting up the Phonebook
HandsFreeLink
Features
241
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to delete. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘The
Phonebook options are store, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new
number for Eric. For example, say
‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The number has
been changed. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account
number) has been stored.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to edit. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘What is the new number for
Eric?’’
2.
1.
4. 3.
4.5.
1.
2.
1.
3.
5.
To list all names in the phonebook, do
this:
To delete a name, do this:
To edit the number of a name, do this:
HandsFreeLink
242
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘This process
will clear all paired phones, clear
all entries in the phonebook, and
clear the passcode. Is this what
you would like to do?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
clear all paired phones, all
phonebook entries, and the
passcode. This may take up to 2
minutes to complete.’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say
‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
period of time, the HFL response
is, ‘‘System has been cleared.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When
the end of the list is reached, the
HFL response is, ‘‘The entire list
has been read. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When it
saysthenameyouwanttocall,for
example, Eric, press the Talk
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
to call Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once
connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob.
This operation clears the HFL of
your passcode, your paired phones,
and all names in the HFL phonebook.
Clearing is recommended before you
sell your vehicle.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
2.
3.
4.
1.
1.
2.
3.
2.
To call a name from the phonebook list,
do this:
To clear the system, do this:
Clearing the System
HandsFreeLink
Features
243
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
＜
＞
＜
＞
If there are paired phones without
French name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘Pour que le système
identifie les téléphones qui ont été
jumelés dans une autre langue, les
noms des téléphones doivent être
ré-enregistrés.’’
If there are paired phones
without French name tags the
following prompts will continue.
The HFL response is, for example,
‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour
Paul’s phone ?’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le
nom Français pour Pat’s phone
?’’ Press and release the Talk
button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de Pat.’’
After all paired phones missing a
French name tag are re-recorded,
the HFL will prompt, ‘‘Retour au
menu principal.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘English or Français?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If there
are no paired phones without
English name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘The language has
been changed. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘You have
selected English. Name tags that
were stored while in French mode
will not be accessible in English
mode. Would you like to
continue?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If there
are no paired phones without
French name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘La langue a été
changée. Retour au menu principal.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez
sélectionné Français. Les noms
enregistrés en mode Anglais ne
seront pas accessible en mode
Français. Voulez-vous continuer?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Change
language.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘English or Français?’’
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
To change from French to English, do
this:
To change from English to French, do
this:
HandsFreeLink
Changing Language
(Canadian Models Only)
244
NOTE:
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
＜
＞
＜
＞
If there are paired phones without
English name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘The language has been
changed. For the system to identify
phones that were paired while in
another language, the phone names
need to be re-recorded.’’
If there are paired phones
without English name tags the
following prompts will continue.
The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What
is the English name for
Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘What is the
English name for Téléphone de
Pat ?’’ Press and release the Talk
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
phone.’’ After all paired phones
missing an English name tag are
re-recorded, the HFL will say
‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
In addition, you cannot use the HFL
while using AcuraLink.
When OnStar is activated during an
HFL call or when using voice control,
the HFL call is placed on hold, or the
HFL stops its voice recognition. The
HFL call will continue when OnStar
use is ended. To operate the HFL
again, press the Talk button. Then
after the beep, say the appropriate
command.
4.
HandsFreeLink
HFL Limitations
Features
245
NOTE:
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
246
Main Menu
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 248
.................Fuel Recommendation . 248
.........Service Station Procedures . 249
.....................................Refueling .249
.........Check Fuel Cap Message .250
Opening and Closing
.................................the Hood .251
....................................Oil Check .253
..............Engine Coolant Check .253
...............................Fuel Economy . 254
...Accessories and Modifications . 255
.............................Carrying Cargo . 257
Before Driving
Before Driving
247
Main Menu
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Do not tow a trailer.
We recommend quality gasolines
containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine
deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane of 91 or higher. If this
octane grade is unavailable, regular
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane of 86 or higher may be used
temporarily. The use of regular
unleaded gasoline can cause metallic
knocking noises in the engine and
will result in decreased engine
performance. The long-term use of
regular-grade gasoline can lead to
engine damage.
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
248
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
Open the fuel fill door by pressing
the button on the driver’s door.
(To open the fuel fill door
manually, see page .)
1.
2.
351
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Quick Start Guide
Before Driving
249
FUEL FILL CAP
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flames
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Consult your dealer.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
on the multi-information display
(see right column on this page),
and the malfunction indicator lamp
mayalsocomeon(seepage ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display after you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), after you start the
engine or while you are driving. Turn
the ignition switch off and confirm
the fuel cap is installed. If it is,
loosen the cap, then retighten until it
clicks at least once.
3.
4.
5.
6.
349
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Service Station Procedures
Check Fuel Cap Message
250
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The CHECK FUEL CAP message
that is displayed after you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position or start the engine, should
go off after tightening the fuel cap,
turning the ignition switch off and on,
then driving over 12 mph (US) or 20
km/h (Canada) for at least 10
minutes. Due to different driving
conditions,itmaytakeafewdrive
trips to make the message go off.
The CHECK FUEL CAP message
displayed while driving should go off
after tightening the fuel cap, turning
the ignition switch off and on, then
driving over 30 mph (US) or 48
km/h (Canada) for at least 45
seconds. Due to different driving
conditions,itmaytakeafewdrive
trips to make the message go off.
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release lever located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
If the system still detects a loose or
missing fuel cap, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If a
loose or missing fuel cap was not the
cause of the CHECK FUEL CAP
message coming on, the MIL will
also come on. When the MIL comes
on, the message goes off.
Turn the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel cap until it clicks at
least once. The MIL goes out after 3
days of normal driving once the cap
is tightened or replaced. If it does
not go out, have your dealer inspect
the vehicle. For more information,
see page .
1.
349
CONTINUED
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
251
HOOD RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
uptherestofthewayandholdit
up.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Reach between the hood and the
front bumper with your finger.
Slide the latch handle up.
To close the hood, lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then firmly press down on
the front edge of the hood. Make
sure it is securely latched.
3.2.
Service Station Procedures
252
LATCH
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower
mark, see on
page .
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its hole.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page .
4.
1.
2.
3.
305
308
CONTINUED
Engine Coolant Check
Adding Engine Oil
Oil Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
253
RESERVE TANK
MAX
MIN
LOWER MARK
UPPER MARK
DIPSTICK
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
schedule. See
on page
.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
298
298
For example,
Improving Fuel EconomyOwner’s Maintenance
Checks
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy
254
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
proper operation.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Your dealer has Acura accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer. If possible,
have your dealer inspect the final
installation.
On vehicles with side curtain
airbags, do not install accessories
on the side pillars or across the
rear windows as these may
interfere with proper operation of
thesidecurtainairbags.
Although non-Acura accessories may
fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability (see page ).258
352
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
255
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some examples are:
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety systems could make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Raising your vehicle with a non-
Acura suspension kit can affect
the handling and stability.
Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Acura suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Non-Acura wheels can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and are not
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with non-
Acura components could seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, and reliability.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
256
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Console compartment
In addition, the trunk pass-through
allows you to carry longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Trunk
Utility pocket
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
257
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX
UTILITY POCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−×
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing
a trailer.
Steps for determining correct load
limit:
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850
lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
[The placard is on the driver’s
doorjamb.]
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 pounds or 395 kilograms.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity in
step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
yourvehicle(seepage ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
283
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
258
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the pedals or seat operation.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your dealer
for further information.
If you carry any items extending
through the trunk pass-through,
tie down or secure all items that
could be thrown around the
vehicle and hurt someone during a
crash or sudden stop.
54
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
259
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo floor hooks can also be
used to tie down and secure items on
the floor.
There are hooks on the floor and
both sides of the trunk. They can be
used to install the cargo net for
securing items. The side cargo
hooks are designed to hold light
items (maximum load: 6 lbf or 3 kgf
for each hook). Heavy objects may
damage the side hooks.
Cargo Hooks
Carrying Cargo
260
SIDE CARGO HOOKS CARGO FLOOR HOOKS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the SH-AWD system, the
vehicle stability assist (VSA) system,
the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), and facts you need if you
are planning to tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 262
.......................Starting the Engine . 263
Check Starting System
..................................Message .264
..............Automatic Transmission . 265
............................SH-AWD System .272
...........................................Parking . 273
.............................Braking System . 274
................Anti-lock Brakes(ABS) . 275
Tires Pressure
....Monitoring System (TPMS) .277
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
........................................System . 281
...........................Towing a Trailer . 283
Driving
Driving
261
Main Menu
Main Menu
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors and the
trunk are securely closed and
locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
pages and ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see page , and
).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
17
119
111
122 123
59 68
76
Preparing to Drive
262
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. The engine’s
starter motor keeps running
automatically for up to 7 seconds
until the engine starts.
The starter motor keeps running
automatically for up to 15 seconds
until the engine starts, if:
Your vehicle’s starting system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:
If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.
The engine does not start within 7
seconds after the starter motor
began to run.
You hold the ignition switch in the
START (III) position for more
than 7 seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Starting the Engine
Driving
263
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from thef t. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page .114
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display when the ignition switch is
turned to ON (II). You will also see
this message when the auto control
mode of the starting system has a
problem.
If this message is on, the ignition
switchhastobeheldinthe
START (III) position manually
until the engine starts. The
ignitionswitchcanbeheldinthat
position up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.
Starting the Engine
Check Starting System Message
264
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in. In the Sequential
SportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicator
next to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on,
and the illuminated number under
the low oil pressure indicator shows
you the gear you have selected.
To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and slide
the lever along the guide on the
console. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
76
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
Automatic Transmission
Driving
265
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
−
−
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift to
reverse from neutral or any other
driving position when the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10
km/h).
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your vehicle’s
battery is disconnected or goes dead,
you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to
on page ).
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
Press the brake
pedal to shift from Park to reverse.
To shift from neutral to reverse,
come to a complete stop and then
shift.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
If you cannot shift to reverse when
the vehicle is stopped, press the
brake pedal, slowly shift to neutral,
andthenshifttoreverse.
270
270
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, then
move the shift lever.
Move the lever.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoN
NtoD
DtoD
DtoD
DtoN
NtoR
RtoP
3
3
Shift Lock Release
Neutral (N)
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R)
Drive (D)
Automatic Transmission
266
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋−
＋
−
−
＋
With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position,
you can select the Sequential
SportShift mode to shift gears much
like a manual transmission, but
without a clutch pedal.
To enter the Sequential SportShift
mode, move the shift lever further to
the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’
move the shift lever to the
passenger’s side.
In Sequential SportShift mode, each
time you push forward on the shift
lever, the transmission shifts to a
higher gear. Pull back on the lever to
downshift. The number of the gear
selected is displayed on the
instrument panel.
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the display
shows the selected gear.
While in the Sequential SportShift
Mode, you can also shift up or down
using the (right side) or (left
side) paddle shifters on the right and
left side of the steering wheel.
For up shift, press the right side ( )
paddle shifter.
For down shift, press the left side
( ) paddle shifter.
CONTINUED
Sequential SportShift Mode
Automatic Transmission
Driving
267
SELECTED GEAR
( ) DOWN SHIFT
( ) UP SHIFT
PADDLE SHIFTER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
→
→
→
→
The transmission may automatically
downshift from the higher gear to
the lower gear under these
conditions:
Driving on level roads and downhill
Driving uphill
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
Thegearindicatorwillflashthe
numberofthelowergearseveral
times, then return to the higher gear.
To shift from
43
54
To shift from
43
54
The transmission remains in the
selectedgear(5,4,3,2,or1).There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
Speed range
under 17 mph
(27 km/h)
under 38 mph
(60 km/h)
When you accelerate away from a
stop, the transmission starts in first
gear. You have to manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometer’s red
zone.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed is under
8mph(13km/h).
If you try to manually downshift at a
speed that would cause the engine to
exceed the redline in a lower gear,
the transmission does not downshift.
If the vehicle speed slows to below
the redline of the selected lower gear
position while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission
downshifts, and the display shows
the selected lower gear.
Speed range
under 41 mph
(65 km/h)
under 47 mph
(75 km/h)
Automatic Transmission
268
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
The table shows the speed ranges
for upshifting and downshifting. When you are in Sequential
SportShift mode, and the vehicle is
stopped, push forward on the shift
lever to shift to second gear. You
will see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting
out in second gear will help to
reduce wheelspin in deep snow or
on a slippery surface.
If you start out in second gear, the
transmission will be fixed in that
gear.
To shift from
12
23
34
45
To shift from
32
43
54
The transmission will not
automatically downshift to first gear
even when the vehicle speed is
under 8 mph (13 km/h). You need to
shift down to first gear manually.
Speed range
over 0 mph
(0 km/h)
over 8 mph
(13 km/h)
over 17 mph
(27 km/h)
over 37 mph
(60 km/h)
Speed range
under 56 mph
(90 km/h)
under 93 mph
(150 km/h)
under 130 mph
(209 km/h)
CONTINUED
Starting in Second Gear
Automatic Transmission
Driving
269
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
Set the parking brake.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work.
This position is
similar to D, except only the first
three gears are selected. Use D
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,
or to provide engine braking when
going down a steep hill. D can also
keep the transmission from cycling
between third, fourth, and fifth gears
in stop-and-go driving.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or
D, you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one,
two, or three gears, depending on
your speed.
To release the reverse lockout, make
sure the ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY(I) position.
1.
2.
3
3
3
Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseDrive (D )
Automatic Transmission
3
270
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover next to the
shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver or a metal fingernail
file to remove the cover. Carefully
pry on the edge of the cover.
Insert a built-in key into the shift
lock release slot.
Push down on the built-in key, and
move the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
Remove the built-in key from the
shift lock release slot, then
reinstall the cover. Make sure the
notchonthecoverisonthedriver’s
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
To release the reverse lockout,
move the shift lever from neutral
to reverse, then to Park.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
271
COVER
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each torque indicator is displayed
as a bar graph divided into 5
segments. The number of
segments represents the amount
of torque distributed to each
wheel.
The SH-AWD torque distribution
monitor on the multi-information
display shows you the amount of
torque being sent to the wheels.
Each wheel: right front (RF), left
front(LF),rightrear(RR),andleft
rear (LR), has its own torque
indicator.
While the SH-AWD system helps to
enhance the vehicle’s driving
stability in all situations. It is still
your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When cruise control is on while
driving, the torque distribution
monitor is not shown.
The SH-AWD system is a full time
all-wheel-drive system that
automatically controls and transfers
varying amounts of engine torque to
all wheels independently, according
to the driving conditions.
When there is only a slight change in
torque distribution while driving,
such as cruising on level roads at the
same speed, the torque distribution
monitor may stop displaying the
amount of torque. This is not a
system problem. The monitor will
show the amount if the system
senses any change in torque
distribution.
SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor
SH-AWD System
272
TORQUE INDICATOR
TORQUE INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the SH-AWD indicator on the
instrument panel stays on, and the
multi-information display shows an
SH-AWD message, there is a
problem with the system. Your
vehicle still has normal front-wheel
drive with vehicle stability assist
(VSA), but does not have the
advantages of SH-AWD. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon
as possible.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors.
SH-AWD System, Parking
Parking
Parking Tips
Driving
273
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Braking System Design
Brake Wear Indicators
Braking System
274
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
this defeats the purpose of the ABS.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If the ABS indicator comes on, the
anti-lock function of the braking
system has shut down. The brakes
still work like a conventional system,
but without anti-lock. You should
have your dealer inspect your vehicle
as soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page .
When the ABS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.
350
You should never pump the brake pedal;
ABS Indicator
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
275
ABS INDICATOR
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
It only helps with steering
control during braking.
Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
ABS cannot prevent the loss of
stability.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
276
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator in the
instrumental panel and the
appropriate tire position indicator on
thetirepressuremonitoronthe
multi-information display (see page
)tocomeon.
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. The
multi-information display also shows
a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message (see page ). You should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure as indicated on the
vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.278
279
325
CONTINUED
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
277
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
flat tire with the compact spare tire
(see page ).
When all tire pressures are normal,
the multi-information display will
show ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE OK
SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL.’’
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the vehicle
placard and in the owner’s manual
(see page ).
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire.
When any of the tires has low
pressure, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE
ERROR SYSTEM FUNCTION
NORMAL’’ message (see page ).
After you replace the flat tire with
the spare, the low tire pressure
indicator stays on. This is normal;
the system is not monitoring the
spare tire pressure. Manually check
the spare tire pressure to be sure it
is correct.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
336
326
72
Changing a Tire with TPMS Tire Pressure Monitor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
278
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If there is a system error with the
TPMS, the multi-information display
showsa‘‘SYSTEMFUNCTION
ERROR’’ message (see page ),
and the tire pressure readings will
not be displayed. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display (see
page ).
If any of the tires have low pressure,
the multi-information display will
shows a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message. You will also see one or
more low pressure tire positions
blinking in the display (see page
).
When the TPMS is functioning
normally, you can press the SEL/
RESETbuttononthesteeringwheel
to see the pressure readings of each
tire in psi (U.S. models) or kPa
(Canadian models) (see page ).
280
72
277
74
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Readings
Driving
279
VEHICLE ICON
U.S.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If one or more tires have low
pressure, the low tire pressure
indicator on the instrument panel
also comes on (see page ).
When cruise control is on while
driving, the pressure reading cannot
be checked by the tire pressure
monitor on the multi-information
display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the multi-information display shows
a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message (see page ). If you see
this message, the system is not
monitoring tire pressure. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon
as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator
comes on, or the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message, the VSA system
automatically turns on even when
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
277 77
282
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Check TPMS System Message
280
CANADA
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink (see
page ).
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When the VSA system indicator
comes on, you will also see a
‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it does not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.If the VSA system indicator comes
on while driving, pull to the side of
theroadwhenitissafe,andturnoff
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II), there may be a problem
with the VSA system. Have your
dealer inspect your vehicle as soon
as possible (see page ).
If the low tire pressure indicator
comes on (see page ), or the
multi-information display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message
(see page ), the VSA system
automatically turns on even when
the VSA system is turned off with
the VSA OFF switch. In this case,
you cannot turn the VSA system off
by pressing the VSA OFF switch
again.
63
63
280
277
VSA Activation Indicator
VSA System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
Driving
281
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you
need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
This switch is at the right side of the
left vent. Press it to turn VSA on and
off.
336
326
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
282
VSA OFF SWITCH
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has been designed to
primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too much tongue
load reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailerandeverthinginoronit
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy
can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
CONTINUED
Load Limits
Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
283
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
and the tongue load is: 4,980 lbs
(2,260 kg)
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle axles are: 2,680 lbs
(1,215 kg) on the front axle, and
2,380 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rear
axle.
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment,
depending on the size of your trailer,
how much load you are towing, and
where you tow. To ensure the best
quality, we recommend that you
purchase Acura equipment
whenever possible.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and maintained,
and that it meets federal, state,
province, and local regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Checking Loads Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Towing a Trailer
Hitches
284
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Acura recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electrically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, and local
regulations. Check with your local
recreational vehicle dealer for the
requirements in your area, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Saf ety Chains Trailer LightsTrailer Brakes
Towing a Trailer
Driving
285
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
286
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
When driving uphill and downhill,
use the Sequential SportShift mode
to provide the proper engine power
and engine braking on each gear.
Select fourth, third, second, or first
gear; depending on the vehicle
speeds and read condition. Do not
use fifth gear. The recommended
speed range for each gear position is
showninthetable.
Speed range
030km/h
(0 19 mph)
30 50 km/h
(19 31 mph)
50 65 km/h
(31 41 mph)
over 65 km/h
(over 41 mph)
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use D position when towing a trailer
on level roads. D is the proper shift
lever position to use when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘
’’onthenextpagefor
additional gear information.)
Gear position
1
2
3
4
3
CONTINUED
Driving Saf ely With a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Making Turns and Braking
Driving
on Hills
Towing a Trailer
Driving
287
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; turn the wheel to the left to
get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
3
bottom
Backing Up
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Parking
Driving on Hills
Towing a Trailer
288
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance messages in the multi-
information display, a maintenance
record, and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 290
....................Maintenance Minder . 291
....................Maintenance Record . 301
..............................Fluid Locations . 303
......Engine Compartment Covers . 304
........................Adding Engine Oil . 305
.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 306
..............................Engine Coolant . 308
....................Windshield Washers . 310
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 310
....................................Brake Fluid . 311
....................Power Steering Fluid . 312
....................................Timing Belt . 313
.............................................Lights . 314
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 321
.....................................Floor Mats . 322
.................................Wiper Blades . 323
...............................................Tires . 325
...................Checking the Battery . 331
.............................Vehicle Storage . 333
381
Maintenance
Maintenance
289
Main Menu
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury f rom moving parts.
290
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
One of the most convenient and
important features of the multi-
information display on your vehicle
is the maintenance minder.
Based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life.
The system also displays the code
for other scheduled maintenance
items needing service.
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the engine oil life
minder according to the table shown
below.
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100% 91%
90% 81%
80% 71%
70% 61%
60% 51%
50% 41%
40% 31%
30% 21%
20% 16%
15% 11%
10% 6%
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life
(%)
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
15%
10%
5%
0%
To see the remaining engine oil life
displayed on the lower right corner
on the multi-information display as a
percentage, turn the ignition switch
to ON (II), and press the SEL/
RESETbuttononthesteeringwheel
repeatedly until the engine oil life
minder appears (see page ).71
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Lif e Minder
Maintenance
291
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼▲
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life minder, the
message ‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ along with
the percentage of oil life remaining,
and the maintenance item code, are
displayed on the lower part of the
multi-information display.
The message will be canceled if the
or buttononthesteeringwheel
is pressed. Press the or button
to see the message again.
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ message along with the
maintenance schedule code
indicating the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change.
Refer to page and for a
complete list of the maintenance
main items and sub items.
299 300
Maintenance Minder
292
MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE
CODE
REMAINING
ENGINE OIL LIFT
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼▲
−
The message will be canceled if the
or buttononthesteeringwheel
is pressed. Press the or button
to see the message again.
When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5
percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ message with the same
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ was displayed. When you
see this message have the indicated
maintenance performed as soon as
possible.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life minder, the
message ‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ along with
the percentage ‘‘5%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the lower part of the multi-
information display when the
calculated engine oil life is 1 5
percent (see page ).291
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
293
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▲▼
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multi-
information display.
If maintenance service is done by
some one other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
If the oil life minder is not
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
buttononthesteeringwheel
repeatedly until it is.
To reset the engine oil life, press
the or button on the steering
wheel to select RESET on the
display, and press the SEL/
RESET button.
To cancel resetting the oil life,
press the or button on the
steering wheel to select CANCEL
on the display, and press the SEL/
RESET button.
If you do not complete the reset
procedure within 30 seconds after
selecting the reset mode, the mode
will be canceled automatically.
If you have the required service
performed but do not reset the
display, or reset the display without
performing the service, the system
will not show the proper
maintenance intervals. This can lead
to serious mechanical problems
because you will no longer have an
accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
1.
2. 3.
Maintenance Minder
294
U.S.
CANADA
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼▲
−
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the oil life minder as previously
described.
The message will be canceled if the
or buttononthesteeringwheel
is pressed. Press the or button
to see the message again.
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the remaining engine
oil life reaches 0 percent, the multi-
information display will show the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
and the maintenance item code. This
message is displayed when the total
mileage after reaching 0 percent
engine oil life is less than 10 miles
(for U.S. models)/10 km (for
Canadian models).
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life minder, the
message ‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ along with
the percentage ‘‘0%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the lower part of the multi-
information display when the
calculated engine oil life is 0 1
percent.
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
295
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼▲
And also, the percentage ‘‘0’’ keeps
blinking on the display.
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0 percent, the multi-
information display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
thetotalmileageaftertheremaining
oillifebecame0percent,andthe
maintenance item code.
This message is displayed when you
drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)
or 10 km (for Canadian models)
after seeing the 0 percent message.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as previously described.
The maximum total mileage shown
with this message is ‘‘999 mile (for
U.S. models) or 999 km (for
Canadian models)’’.
The message will be canceled if the
or buttononthesteeringwheel
is pressed. Press the or button
to see the message again.
This particular message is displayed
whenthemileageaftertheengineoil
lifebecame0percentreaches10
miles (for U.S. models)/10 km (for
Canadian models).
Maintenance Minder
296
MAINTENANCE CODE
CANADA
U.S.
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life
minder, the message ‘‘CHANGE
OIL’’ along with the maintenance
item code, and the total negative
mileage after the oil life became 0
percent, will be displayed on the
lower part of the multi-information
display.
This particular message is displayed
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing 0 percent.
Your authorized dealer knows your
vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all receipts
as proof of completion, and have the
person who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend the use of Acura
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
The maximum total negative mileage
is ‘‘ 999 mile (for U.S. models) or
999 km (for Canadian models)’’.
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
297
TOTAL PAST DUE MILAGE
U.S.
CANADA
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Acura
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed in accordance
with the intervals indicated by the
Multi-Information Display.
253
308
310
311
325
314
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA
standards.
298
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
299
:
Independent of the maintenance messages in the Multi-Information
Display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column
on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
NOTE:
1:
298
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Rotate tires
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and line (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
A
B
Symbol
1
Maintenance Minder
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Minder
300
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission and transfer temperatures.
This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regulary drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under-20°F,
29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada)
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Maintenance Sub Items
Replace rear differential fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid This requires
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
regulary drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
Symbol
6
Maintenance Minder
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
301
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle.
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
302
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊: The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the right compartment cover.
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
303
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Black cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID
(Red cap)
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The component parts in the engine
compartment are protected by
several covers. You may need to
remove the covers when you
perform some simple maintenance
work.
All of the covers are secured by
holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover,
remove the holding clips with a flat-
tipped screwdriver.
To remove the left or right engine
compartment cover, remove the
holding clips by loosening the pins in
the center of the fastener.
To remove the battery cover, turn
the knob of the fastener (see page
).332
Engine Compartment Covers
304
FRONT BULKHEAD COVER
RIGHT COMPARTMENT COVER LEFT COMPARTMENT COVER
BATTERY COVER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the left valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Install the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Oil is major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
CONTINUED
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
305
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Ambient Temperature
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals given on the maintenance
schedule.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multi-
information display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
1.
2.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Changing the Oil and Filter
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
306
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
307
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
308
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any spill
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
3.1.
2.
4.
5.
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
309
RADIATOR CAP
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
If the washer fluid is low, a
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission as shown.
Remove the dipstick, and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Windshield Washers Automatic Transmission Fluid
Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
310
NOTICE:
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
Do not use engine antif reeze
or a vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on a maintenance
message in the Multi-Information
Display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,
independent of mileage.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
tube to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
5.
6.
CONTINUED
Brake Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
Maintenance
311
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
After removing the right engine
compartment cover (see page ),
check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
304
Power Steering Fluid
Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
312
MAX MIN
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
If you frequently tow a trailer.
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown on the
maintenance minder. Replace the
belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if
you regularly drive your vehicle in
one or more of these conditions:
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Timing Belt
Maintenance
313
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
replaced.
Your vehicle has halogen high beam
headlight bulbs which is also used
for the daytime running light.
Handle it by its base and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic headlight adjusting
system that adjusts the vertical aim
of the low beam headlights
automatically. Refer to page for
more information.
The high beam headlights were
properly aimed when your vehicle
was new. If you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or pull a
trailer, readjustment may be
required. Adjustment of the high
beam headlights should be
performed by a dealer or other
mechanic.
108
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight/Daytime
Running Light Bulb
314
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover from
thesideyouareworkingonby
carefully pulling the cover out (see
page ).
Ifyouarereplacingthebulbon
the driver’s side, remove the
battery cover (see page ), then
remove the battery hold-down by
removing the two nuts with a 10
mm wrench. Then carefully slide
the battery toward the engine to
access the bulb.
2.
3.
304
332
1.
Lights
Maintenance
315
NUTS
BULB
BATTERY HOLD-DOWN
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
(Driver’s side)
Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Push the bulb in slightly, and turn
it counterclockwise.
Reinstall the battery in the reverse
order of removal, and reinstall the
cover on the battery.
Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover from
thesideyouareworkingonby
carefully pulling the cover out (see
page ).
If you are replacing a driver’s side
bulb, slide the battery toward the
engine to get more clearance (see
page ).
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
304
332
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Bulb
316
SOCKETBULB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
(Driver’s side)
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover (see
page ).
(Passenger’s side)
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the
windshield washer reservoir.
If you are replacing a driver’s side
bulb, slide the battery toward the
engine to get more clearance (see
page ).
Reinstall the battery and the
battery cover.
Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover.
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
4.
304
332
CONTINUED
Lights
Replacing a Front Position/Side
Marker Light Bulb
Maintenance
317
BULB
HOLDING CLIP
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the two mounting bolts
and remove the holding clip with a
flat-tipped screwdriver.
Carefully push up the side under
cover into the bumper.
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
(Driver’s side)
Reinstall the battery and the
battery cover.
Reinstall the windshield washer
reservoir.
(Passenger’s side)
Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover.
1.
2.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
318
BOLTS
CLIP
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
Reinstall the two mounting bolts
on the side under cover and
tighten them securely. Put the
holding clip back on the side
under cover and push on the
centre until it locks (the centre is
flushwiththehead).
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
319
BULB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: turn signal or back-
up light.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the burned out bulb by
pulling it straight out of its socket.
Open the trunk lid, and remove
the left or right maintenance lid.
Remove the mounting nut with an
8mmwrench.
Carefully pry in the top or bottom
edge of the with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver, and pull the trim
straight back.
Remove the two mounting bolts
with an 8 mm wrench.
Pull the taillight assembly straight
back out of the body.
2.
1. 3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
320
MOUNTING NUT
MAINTENANCE LID
BOLTS
BULBS
TAIL LIGHT TRIM
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Install the new bulb in the socket
by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Tighten the mounting nut securely,
and reinstall the maintenance lid.
When reinstalling the taillight
assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Tighten the two
mounting bolts and reinstall the
trim in place.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Cleaning the Seat Belts
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Maintenance
321
LOOP
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the rear floor mats are
properly hooked to the floor mat
anchors. Your vehicle is equipped
with front passenger’s seat weight
sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor
mat is on the seat rail of the front
passenger’s seat, the sensors will
detect the decreased weight on the
seat and they may not work properly.
If you use a non-Acura floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
canbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over floor mat anchors.
This keeps the floor mats from
sliding forward/rearward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensor’s ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
Floor Mats
Floor Mats
322
DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT
FRONT PASSENGER’S
SIDE FLOOR MAT
REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
Front
Front
Front
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the edge of the cover on the
blade assembly until the other side
of edge is pivoted out, and remove
the cover.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by removing
the two screws from the arm.
Adjust the windshield wiper arms
to the winter position by holding
bothwiperarmsasshowninthe
illustration at the same time (see
page ). Raise the wiper arms
off the windshield.
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
2.1.
3.
103
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
323
COVER
SCREWS
WIPER ARMS
HOLDING LOCATIONS
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage
the hood and the wiper arms.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Reinstall the blade assembly to the
wiper arm and tighten the two
screws securely. Reinstall the
cover by pushing in.
Set the wiper arms back on the
windshield. Adjust the windshield
wipers to their previously parked
position.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
Wiper Blades
324
BLADE
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km).
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametime.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Thetirepressuremonitoringsystem
(TPMS)willwarnyouwhenatire
pressure is low. See page for
information on the TPMS. Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page .
277
326
Tires
Inflation Guidelines
Maintenance
325
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal; do not
release air to match the cold
pressure.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Excessive tread wear.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
This chart shows the recommended
cold tire pressures for most normal
and high speed driving conditions.
For additional technical information
about your tires, see page .367
Tire Size/Ttpe
Compact Spare
Cold Tire Pressure
Front
Rear
Tires
Tire InspectionRecommended Tire Pressures
326
T155/70D17
110M
P245/50R17 98V
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km). Move the tires to the positions
showninthecharteachtimethey
are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-to-
back.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
If you rotate tires, check air pressure
of all tires.
Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation
Maintenance
327
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Front Front
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size explanation.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your vehicle.
Replacement wheels are available at
your Acura dealer.
368
370
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels Wheels and Tires
328
17x8.0JAL(TPMS)
P245/50R17 98V
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Mount snow chains on your tires
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Acura strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain
CH2612T
CONTINUED
Tires
Winter Driving
Tire ChainsSnow Tires
Maintenance
329
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Tires
330
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
To see the label, remove the battery
cover (see page ).332
CONTINUED
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
Maintenance
331
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, all stored
driving positions will be lost. To
store the driving positions again, see
the storing procedure on page .
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If you vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradioyouwill
see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
). You will then have enter your
station presets.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
power tilt and telescopic steering
wheel system will be disabled. The
system needs to be reset after
reconnecting the battery (see page
).
Push the tabs and remove the
cover by pulling it up carefully.
To reinstall the cover, put the tabs
of the cover back to the original
position properly.
Turn the knob of the battery cover
toUNLOCKasshowninthe
illustration.
Turn the knob of the cover to
LOCK position as showing in the
illustration.
124 112
199
1.
2.
3.
4.
On vehicles with navigation system
Checking the Battery
Removing the Battery Cover
332
KNOB
TAB
LOCK
UNLOCK
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
333
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
334
Main Menu
Main Menu
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 336
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 337
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 341
................................Jump Starting . 343
..............If the Engine Overheats . 345
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 348
..........Charging System Indicator . 348
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 349
...............Brake System Indicator . 350
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
....................................Manually . 351
..............................................Fuses . 352
..............................Fuse Locations . 357
......................Emergency Towing . 360
..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 361
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
335
Main Menu
Main Menu
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces. Use greater caution while
driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Turn off the VSA system (see
page ). Driving with the
compact spare tire may activate
the VSA system.
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
282
Compact Spare Tire
336
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake. Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all passengers get
out of the vehicle while you
change the tire.
Open the trunk, and fold the trunk
floor forward.
Unscrew the wing bolt, and
remove the spacer cone. Then
take the spare tire out of its well.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
337
SPARE TIRE
TRUNK FLOOR
TOOL CASE
JACK
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
△
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Temporarily
place the flat tire on the ground
with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. It is pointed to by a
mark molded into the underside of
the body. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
6. 7. 8.
9.
Changing a Flat Tire
338
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
EXTENSION
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
10. 11. 12.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
339
BRAKE HUB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Store the jack and tools in the tool
case. Place the tool case in the flat
tire.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Wrap the spacer cone and spare
tire wing bolt with cloth or paper,
and store them in the spare tire
well.
14.13.
15.
16.
Changing a Flat Tire
340
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
Loose items can fly around the
interiorinacrashandcould
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
thefusesareOK,thereis
probably something wrong with
the electrical circuit for the
ignition switch or starter motor.
You will need a qualified
technician to determine the
problem (see
on page ).
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal
connections (see page ). You
canthentryjumpstartingthe
vehicle from a booster battery
(see page ).
Check these things:
Make sure the remote is with you,
inside the vehicle.
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III):
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights, and check
their brightness. If the headlights
areverydimordonotcomeonat
all, the battery is discharged. See
on page .
343
343
360
331
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Emergency Towing
Jump Starting
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Taking Care of the Unexpected
341
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Are you using a properly coded
built-in key or remote? An
improperly coded built-in key or
remote will cause the immobilizer
system indicator in the instrument
panel to blink rapidly (see page
).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
114
263
352
360
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineWon’tStart
342
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
＋
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
Remove the battery cover (see
page ), then remove the
secondary under-hood fuse box
cover from the positive ( )
terminal on the battery.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake.
1.
2.
3.
332
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
343
COVER
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
＋−
＋
＋
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Reinstall the secondary under-
hood fuse box cover over the
positive ( ) terminal of the
battery, then reinstall the battery
cover.
Keep the ends of the jumper
cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding point
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
7.
5.
6.
8.
4.
9.
Jump Starting
344
BOOSTER BATTERY
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood,
turn off the engine. Wait until
you see no more signs of steam
or spray, then open the hood.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
360
CONTINUED
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
345
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Start the engine, and set the
interior temperature to maximum
(climate control to FULL AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
360
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
346
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
You can still drive your vehicle even
if this message appears on the multi-
information display, however you
should check the temperature gauge
while driving.
If there is a problem with the
radiator system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK RADIATOR SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).
If you notice the temperature gauge
climbing to or above the red mark,
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Follow the instructions on pages
and .
If you see this message, the engine
has probably overheated. You should
take your vehicle to a dealer, and
have it repaired as soon as possible.
345 346
76
IftheEngineOverheats
Check Radiator System
Taking Care of the Unexpected
347
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE
OIL LEVEL’’ message on the multi-
information display, the oil pressure
has dropped very low or lost
pressure. Serious engine damage is
possible, and you should take
immediate action.
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, or if you
see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, the battery is
not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a dealer or a service station
where you can get technical
assistance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
305
360
253
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Emergency Towing
Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
348
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition to ON (II), without starting
the engine. The malfunction
indicator lamp will come on for 20
seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
times, the readiness codes are not
set. If possible, do not take your
vehicle for a state emissions test
until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to
for more information (see page ).
If your vehicle battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. If takes at least
three days of normal driving to set
the codes again.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the multi-information display.
Tighten the cap until it clicks at least
once (see page ). Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it takes at least three
days of normal driving.
If this indicator comes on
while driving, or if you see
a ‘‘CHECK EMISSION
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, it means one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
374
249
State Emissions Testing
Readiness Code
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
349
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. You will see a
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message on
the multi-information display. Press
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it
feels normal. If it does, check the
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
).
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) and as a reminder to check the
parking brake. If you do not release
the parking brake, the indicator will
stay on, and you will see a
‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’
message on the multi-information
display.
360
311
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
350
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
To open the fuel fill door, pull the
release lever rearward.
If the fuel fill door release button
does not work, use the release lever
inside the left maintenance lid in the
trunk.
Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
Taking Care of the Unexpected
351
LID
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
To open the secondary fuse box lid,
push the tab in the direction shown
in the illustration.
The fuses are located in five fuse
boxes. The interior fuse boxes are
located under the dashboard on the
driver’s and passenger’s side.
To remove the fuse box lid, put your
finger in the notch on the lid, pull it
toward you, and take it out of its
hinges.
Fuses
352
FUSE BOX
NOTCH
NOTCH
TAB
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s side
SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
The primary under-hood fuse box is
in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
The secondary under-hood fuse box
is on the battery. To open it, push
thetabsasshown.
To check the fuse box, remove the
battery cover first (see page ).332
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
353
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
TAB
TAB
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
, , and , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller. The fuse puller is inside the
primary under-hood fuse box.
3. 4.1.
2.
357
359
358
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
354
FUSE
BLOWN
FUSE
PULLER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits with
the fuse puller provided in the under-
hood fuse box. Make sure you can
do without that circuit temporarily
(such as the accessory power socket
or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
6.
5.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
355
BLOWN
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Ifthefuseforthedrivingposition
memory system is removed, all
stored driving positions will be lost.
To store the driving positions again,
see page .
If the navigation system fuse is
removed, the navigation system will
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).
Ifthefuseforthepowertilt
telescopic steering is removed, the
system will be disabled. The system
needs to be reset after reinstalling
thefuse(seepage ).
124
199
112
On vehicles with navigation system
Fuses
356
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
−
＊
＊
No. Amps. Amps.
No. Amps.
No.
Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 A
30 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
7.5 A
15 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
70 A
120 A
50 A
50 A
150A
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Radiator fan
Left headlight low beam
Rear defroster coil
Left headlight high beam
Small light
Right headlight high beam
Right headlight low beam
Back-up
FI ECU
Wiper
Headlight washer
Fog lights
MG clutch
Horn, Stop
Rear defroster
Back-up, ACC
Hazard
VSA motor
VSA
Drive by wire, Laf heater
Not used (OP)
Heater motor
Passenger’s fuse box
Battery
IG main
Power window
: On Canadian models
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
357
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
No. Amps. No. Amps.
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
20 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
(7.5 A)
1
2
7.5 A
7.5 A
Starter diag.
Starter signal
DrivebyWire
Ignition coil
Daytime running light
Laf heater
Radio
Interior light
Back-up
Door lock
Accessory socket
Occupant position detection
system
Wiper
Driver’s power seat sliding
Power lumbar support
Driver’s power seat reclining
ACG
Fuel Pump
IGN SOL
Meter
SRS
IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
Left rear power window
ETS (telescopic)
ETS (tilt)
Driver’s power window
Moonroof
AFS
A/C
SH-AWD
ACC
Option
Tire pressure monitoring system
Passenger’s power seat reclining
Passenger’s power seat sliding
Fuse Locations
358
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side
SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
No. Amps.No. Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
6
7
8
9
20 A
7.5 A
30 A
7.5 A
1
2
3
4
5
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
SH-AWD
Premium amplifier
Passenger’s power window
Driver’s automatic seat belt
tensioner
Right rear power window
Heated seats
Interior lights
Passenger’s automatic seat
belt tensioner
Air conditioner
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
359
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s side
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
Emergency Towing
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment.
360
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page ).
The cover is attached to the bumper
with a tether.
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
Remove the cover from the front
bumper by pushing the right
corner edge of the cover with a
finger until the cover comes out as
shown in the illustration.
To use the towing hook:
1.
360
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Taking Care of the Unexpected
361
Push
COVER
TETHER
COVER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the spare tire.
Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
2.
3.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
362
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
................Identification Numbers . 364
................................Specifications . 366
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 368
.................................Treadwear . 368
......................................Traction . 368
.............................Temperature . 369
.................................Tire Labeling . 370
.......................Emissions Controls . 371
.....................The Clean Air Act . 371
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 371
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 371
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 371
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 372
....................PGM-FI System . 372
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 372
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 372
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 372
....................Replacement Parts . 372
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 373
..............State Emissions Testing . 374
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle, and the location of
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Technical Information
Technical Information
363
Main Menu
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
364
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
U.S. vehicle is shown.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front
left, below the valve cover.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
365
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
366
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
193.6 in (4,917 mm)
72.7 in (1,847 mm)
57.1 in (1,451 mm)
110.2 in (2,800 mm)
62.0 in (1,576 mm)
62.4 in (1,585 mm)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.8 17.60 oz (450 500 g)
ND-OIL8
1.59 US gal (6.0 )
2.27 US gal (8.6 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
2.9 US qt (2.7 )
7.9 US qt (7.5 )
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
0.79 US qt (0.75 )
0.77 US qt (0.73 )
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
6.9 US qt (6.5
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
0.45 US qt (0.43 )
0.48 US qt (0.45
)
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Rear differential fluid
SH-AWD
differential
case
SH-AWD
clutch case
Transfer
assembly
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
1:
2:
Approx.
Front
Rear
Change
Total
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. vehicles
Canadian
vehicles
19.4 US gal (73 )
0.16 US gal (0.58
)
2.8 US qt (2.7
)
1
2
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＋
−
Specifications
Technical Information
367
Battery
Fuses
Engine
Tires
Lights
Alignment
12 V
12 V
60 W
24/2.2 CP
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
3CP
21 W
21 W
55 W
5W
8W
8W
5W
2CP
5W
Capacity
Interior
Under-hood
12 V
12 V
55 AH/5 HR
72 AH/20 HR
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Spark plug gap
3.54x3.58in(89x93mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm
)
11.0 : 1
IZFR6K11
SKJ20DR-M11
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
Size
Pressure
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°8’
1°15’
2°10’
P245/50R17 98V
T155/70D17 110M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
SOHC VTEC V-6 gasoline engine
See page 359 and 360 or the fuse
label attached to the inside of
each fuse box cover.
See page 358 or the fuse box
cover.
Headlights (High Beam)
Front turn signal
Front side marker
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up light
Fog lights
License plate lights
Ceiling lights
Vanity mirror lights
Door courtesy lights
Trunk light
Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge
tube (D2S).
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
NGK:
DENSO:
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
(Amber)
:
(Amber)
0
0.1 mm
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
368
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature A,B,C
Technical Information
369
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below. The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Max Press
Max Load
P
R
V
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
245
50
17
98
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
370
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
P245/50R17 98V
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on pages
and .300299
Emissions Controls
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Technical Information
371
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work
together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Acura replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The three way catalytic converters
are in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, they convert HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
372
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converters
contain precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converters are referred
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx.
Replacement units must be original
Acura parts or their equivalent.
The three way catalytic converters
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. They can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near them. Park your vehicle away
from high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converters.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converters
ineffective.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Three Way Catalytic Converters
Technical Information
373
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
374
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
375
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
376
Main Menu
Main Menu
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact the Acura
Client Services Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
Vehicle identification number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
364
Customer Service Information
378
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7028
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthe
vehicle.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Acura accessories are covered under
this warranty. Time and mileage
limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
covers all Acura
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2005 Acura Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2005 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
379
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Acura Automobile Division,
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
380
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
５
Ａ
Ｃ
Ｕ
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
381
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Publication
Form Number
61SJA00
61SJA00EL
61SJA30
31SJA600
31SJA700
31SJAM00
31SJAQ00
ACU-R
Form Description
2005 Acura RL
Service Manual Base Book
2005 Acura RL
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2005 Acura RL
Body Repair Manual
2005 Acura RL Owner’s Manual
2005 Acura RL Navigation Manual
2005 Acura RL
Maintenance Journal
2005 Acura RL Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each
$77.00
$47.00
$44.00
$42.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
382
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Table of Contents
....................................Accessories . 255
ACCESSORY (Ignition Switch
.....................................Position) . 115
............Accessory Power Sockets . 156
.....................................Acura Link . 208
Adaptive Front Lighting System
..........................................(AFS) . 107
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 305
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 25
............................Air Conditioning . 162
.........................................Usage . 163
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 326
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 248
......................................Antifreeze . 308
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 62, 275
...................................Operation . 275
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 199
Anti-theft Steering Column
............................................Lock . 115
.........................................Ashtrays . 157
................................Audio System . 171
Auto Control Mode, Starting
........................................Engine . 263
.......................Automatic Lighting . 105
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22
.............Automatic Speed Control . 201
..............Automatic Transmission . 265
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 366
...............Checking Fluid Level . 310
.......................................Shifting . 265
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 265
................Shift Lever Positions . 265
....................Shift Lock Release . 270
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 60, 348
............................Jump Starting . 343
..............................Maintenance . 331
..........................................Cover . 322
............................Specifications . 367
..............................Before Driving . 247
..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21
.........................Beverage Holders . 154
..................................Booster Seats . 51
Brakes
Anti-lock Brake
........................System (ABS) . 275
.............Break-in, New Linings . 248
...........................................Fluid . 311
.......................................Parking . 151
.................System Indicator . 61, 350
........................Wear Indicators . 274
.............................Braking System . 274
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 248
Brightness Control,
...............................Instruments . 109
......................Brights, Headlights . 104
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 320
.......................Front Fog Lights . 318
...............Front Position Lights . 317
........Front Side Marker Lights . 317
.................................Headlights . 314
............................Specifications . 367
............Turn Signal Lights . 316, 320
.....................................Built-in-key . 128
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 314
Index
A
B
INDEX
I
Main Menu
Main Menu
............................Capacities Chart . 366
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
....................Cargo, How to Carry . 257
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
.........................................CD Care . 196
.......................CD Error Message . 197
...................................CD Changer . 187
................................Ceiling Lights . 160
........................Certification Label . 364
.................................Chains, Tires . 329
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 337
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 306
......................................When to . 291
...Charging System Indicator . 60, 348
............Checklist, Before Driving . 262
.....................................Child Safety . 36
..............................Booster Seats . 51
...................................Child Seats . 43
Important Safety
...............................Reminders . 36
..........................................Infants . 41
..........................Larger Children . 50
.........................................LATCH . 45
......................Risks with Airbags . 37
.............................Small Children . 42
.........................................Tethers . 49
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 37
.......................................Child Seats . 42
.........................................LATCH . 45
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49
................Childproof Door Locks . 118
Cleaning
...................................Seat Belts . 321
...............Climate Control System . 162
........................CO in the Exhaust . 371
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 263
......................Compact Spare Tire . 336
.................Console Compartment . 155
.................Consumer Information . 378
.............Controls, Instruments and . 57
Coolant
........................................Adding . 308
....................................Checking . 253
.........................Proper Solution . 308
...................Temperature Gauge . 68
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 371
................Cruise Control Indicator . 64
............Cruise Control Operation . 201
...................................Cup Holders . 154
.............Customer Service Office . 378
.........................Customize Settings . 78
..................Door/Window Setup . 94
.........KEYLESS ACCESS Setup . 88
.............................Lighting Setup . 91
.................................Meter Setup . 82
..............................Position Setup . 85
........................Setting to Default . 80
.................................Wiper Setup . 99
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 4, 58
..............Daytime Running Lights . 106
Daytime Running Lights
.......................................Indicator . 64
.................................Dead Battery . 343
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 380
..............Defogger, Rear Window . 110
..............Defrosting the Windows . 168
..........................Differential Fluid . 366
....................................Dimensions . 366
.............Dimming the Headlights . 104
Index
D
C
II
Main Menu
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 310
..................................Engine Oil . 253
........................Directional Signals . 104
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 274
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 307
Doors
............Locking and Unlocking . 116
..................Lockout Prevention . 116
.......................Monitor Indicator . 60
....................Power Door Locks . 116
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 368
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7
.......................................Driver’s ID . 86
...........................................Driving . 261
....................................Economy . 254
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 124
..............................Economy, Fuel . 254
..................................Emergencies . 335
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 343
...........Brake System Indicator . 350
................Changing a Flat Tire . 337
.....Charging System Indicator . 348
..................Checking the Fuses . 354
.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 109
............................Jump Starting . 343
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 348
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 349
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
................................Manually . 351
..................Overheated Engine . 345
.......................................Towing . 360
.........................Emergency Brake . 151
....................Emergency Flashers . 109
......................Emergency Towing . 360
..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 118
.......................Emissions Controls . 371
.............Emissions Testing, State . 374
Engine
............Check Starting System . 264
...............Compartment Covers . 304
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68
.........................If It Won’t Start . 341
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 60, 349
.........................................Oil life . 291
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 348
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 305
...............................Overheating . 345
............................Specifications . 367
............................Speed Limiter . 270
.......................................Starting . 263
...................Engine Speed Limiter . 270
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 248
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 371
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 372
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 19
...................................Fan, Interior . 164
.........................................Features . 161
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 249
Filters
...............................................Oil . 306
...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 109
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 337
.....................................Floor Mats . 322
Index
E
F
INDEX
III
Main Menu
Main Menu
＊＊
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 310
..........................................Brake . 311
..........................Power Steering . 312
..................Windshield Washer . 310
.....................................Fog Lights . 106
........................Four-way Flashers . 109
............................Front Airbags . 11, 27
......................................Front Seat . 119
....................................Adjusting . 119
.......................................Heaters . 142
...................................Airbags . 11, 27
...........................Air Ventilation . 143
.................................................Fuel . 248
.........................Check Fuel Cap . 250
......................Fill Door and Cap . 249
...........................................Gauge . 68
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 64
................Octane Requirement . 248
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
................................Manually . 351
...............................Oxygenated . 248
........................Tank, Refueling . 249
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 354
................Gas Mileage Improving . 254
.........................................Gasoline . 248
...........................................Gauge . 68
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 64
................Octane Requirement . 248
........................Tank, Refueling . 249
................Gas Station Procedures . 249
.............................................Gauges . 68
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68
...............................................Fuel . 68
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 284
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 265
......................................Glove Box . 153
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 284
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 314
........................Hands Free Link . 231
............Hazard Warning Flashers . 109
Headlights
Adaptive Front Lighting System
......................................(AFS) . 107
........................................Aiming . 314
..................Automatic Lighting . 105
.........Daytime Running Lights . 106
..................High Beam Indicator . 64
....................Lights On Indicator . 62
..........Low Beams, Turning on . 104
.......................Reminder Chime . 104
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 314
..........High beams, Turning on . 104
...................................Washer . 102
............................Head Restraints . 120
...............................Heated Mirror . 123
...................................Heater, Seat . 142
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 264
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 204
.......................Hood, Opening the . 251
................................................Horn . 101
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 364
Index
G
H
I
IV
TM
Main Menu
Main Menu
CONTINUED
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 338
.......................................Jack, Tire . 337
................................Jump Starting . 343
................................................Keys . 113
................Keyless Access System . 127
...............Keyless Access Remote . 128
...........Keyless Memory Settings . 134
.......................Label, Certification . 364
...............Lane Change, Signaling . 104
........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 21
........................Lights On Indicator . 62
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 314
.......................................Indicator . 59
......................................Position . 104
................................Turn Signal . 104
.....................................Load Limit . 283
....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 115
Locks
.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 115
........................Childproof Door . 118
............................Fuel Fill Door . 249
..................................Glove Box . 153
...............................Power Door . 116
.........................................Trunk . 117
......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 121
........................Low Coolant Level . 253
Ignition
............................................Keys . 113
.........................................Switch . 115
............Timing Control System . 372
......................Immobilizer System . 114
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.........................................Indicators . 60
ABS (Anti-lock Brake
............................System) . 62, 275
Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 61, 274
................Charging System . 60, 348
.............................Cruise Control . 64
DRL (Daytime Running
......................................Lights) . 64
...................................High Beam . 64
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 62
......................................Low Fuel . 64
................Low Oil Pressure . 60, 348
Low Tire Pressure
...........................Indicator . 65, 277
.......................................Message . 66
......................................SH-AWD . 65
...........................Side Airbag Off . 61
...............................................SRS . 61
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 63
..VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) . 63
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59
...............................Infant Restraint . 41
......................................Infant Seats . 41
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 325
.................................Inside Mirror . 122
.............................Inspection, Tire . 326
............................Instrument Panel . 59
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 109
................Interface Dial . 163, 171, 208
...............................Interior Lights . 160
........................................Introduction . i
Index
J
K
L
INDEX
V
Main Menu
Main Menu
..............................Paddle Shifters . 267
............Panel Brightness Control . 109
........................Park Gear Position . 266
...........................................Parking . 266
...............................Parking Brake . 151
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 61, 350
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 373
.............................PGM-FI System . 372
........................Power Door Locks . 116
...............Power Socket Locations . 156
............................Power Windows . 145
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 20
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 36
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 64
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 348
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 366
..........................Luggage, Storing . 257
..................................Maintenance . 289
................................Main Items . 299
........................................Minder . 291
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 298
.................................Record . 301-302
..........................................Safety . 290
.............................Schedule . 291-300
...................................Sub Items . 300
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 60, 349
...........Memory, Driving Position . 124
.............................Message Display . 76
..........................Message Indicator . 66
...............................Meters, Gauges . 68
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 248
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 122
.................................Modifications . 255
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 256
................................Moonroof . 147-150
................................................MP3 . 193
.............Multi-Information Display . 69
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 248
.........................................Odometer . 70
...............................Odometer, Trip . 70
Oil
........................Change, How to . 306
......................Change, When to . 291
......................Checking Engine . 253
...............................Life, Engine . 291
..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 348
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 305
.....ON (Ignition Switch Position) . 115
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 371
............................................OnStar . 217
............................Outside Mirrors . 123
....Outside Temperature Indicator . 71
....................Overheating, Engine . 345
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 298
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 248...................Neutral Gear Position . 266
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 248
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 364
Index
O
P
M
N
VI
Main Menu
Main Menu
＊
＊＊
＊
CONTINUED
.......................Protecting Infants . 41
.......Protecting Larger Children . 50
.........Protecting Small Children . 42
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 49
.............................Using LATCH . 45
...................Radiator Overheating . 345
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 171
...........................Readiness Codes . 349
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 320
..........................Rear View Mirror . 122
...............Rear Window Defogger . 110
.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 119
.......................Reminder Indicators . 60
...........................................Remote . 128
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 306
..........................................Fuses . 352
................................Light Bulbs . 314
....................................Schedule . 291
...........................................Tires . 325
.............................Wiper Blades . 323
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 23
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 253
...............................Restraint, Child . 36
..................Reverse Gear Position . 266
......................................Roof Rack . 259
................................Rotation, Tire . 327
................................Safety Belts . 10, 21
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 380
.................................Safety Features . 9
.........................................Airbags . 11
.....................................Seat Belts . 10
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55
...............................Safety Messages . ii
...................Satellite Digital Radio . 181
...................................Seat Belts . 10, 21
...............Additional Information . 21
.Automatic Seat Belt Tensioner . 22
.....................................Cleaning . 321
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 21
................................Maintenance . 23
Reminder Indicator and
................................Beeper . 21, 60
...................System Components . 21
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
..................................Seat Heaters . 142
..................Seat Position Memory . 124
.........................Seat Ventilation . 143
......................Seats, Adjusting the . 119
............................Security System . 200
.....Sequential Sports Shift Mode . 267
..........................Paddle Shifters . 267
...............................Serial Number . 364
...........................Service Intervals . 291
...........................Service Manual . 381
.........Service Station Procedures . 249
........................................SH-AWD . 272
..Torque Distribution Monitor . 272
.......................................Indicator . 65
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 265
........................Shift Lock Release . 270
..............................Side Airbags . 11, 30
How the Side Airbag off
......................Indicator Works . 33
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30
................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 32
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 32
Index
INDEX
R
S
VII
Main Menu
Main Menu
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 335
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 368
.....Emissions Control Systems . 371
Three Way Catalytic
.............................Converters . 373
.......................Temperature Gauge . 68
........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 170
....................Temperature, Outside . 71
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 49
Three Way Catalytic
.................................Converters . 373
Tilt/Telescopic Steering
.........................................Wheel . 111
....................................Timing Belt . 313
....................................Tire Chains . 329
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 337
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
..................................(TPMS) . 277
Monitoring Tire Pressure
..................................Reading . 329
...........TPMS System Warning . 280
...............................................Tires . 325
..............................Air Pressure . 326
........................................Chains . 329
.........................Checking Wear . 326
..........................Compact Spare . 336
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 368
......................................Inflation . 325
..................................Inspection . 326
...................................Replacing . 328
......................................Rotating . 327
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
.........................Replacement in . 317
.............................Signaling Turns . 104
.....................................Snow Tires . 329
................................Sound System . 171
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 336
............................Specifications . 367
....................Specifications Charts . 366
................................Speed Limiter . 270
.......................................Spotlights . 160
..........SRS, Additional Information . 24
...Additional Safety Precautions . 35
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32
How Your Airbags
............................Work . 27, 30, 32
........................SRS Components . 24
..................................SRS Service . 34
.............................SRS Indicator . 32, 61
START (Ignition Switch
.....................................Position) . 115
.......................Starting the Engine . 263
...................Auto Control Mode . 263
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 263
................With a Dead Battery . 343
..............State Emissions Testing . 374
........Steam Coming from Engine . 345
Steering Wheel
..............................Adjustments . 111
...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 115
......................Position Memory . 124
Steering Wheel Buttons/
.....................................Switches . 198
...................Stereo Sound System . 171
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 333
......................................Sun Visors . 156
Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 11, 24
......................................Servicing . 34
.........................SRS Indicator . 32, 61
...................System Components . 24
..................................Synthetic Oil . 305
Index
T
VIII
Main Menu
Main Menu
...........................................Snow . 329
............................Specifications . 367
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 337
Torque Distribution Monitor
.................................(SH-AWD) . 272
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 283
................Emergency Wrecker . 360
....Equipment and Accessories . 284
.............................Weight Limit . 283
.............................................TPMS . 277
.............................Trailer Loading . 283
......................Trailer Towing Tips . 287
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 310
...........................Fluid Selection . 310
..............Identification Number . 364
.............Shifting the Automatic . 265
.....................................Treadwear . 336
.......................................Trip Meter . 70
..............................................Trunk . 117
..................Emergency Opener . 118
...............................Opening the . 117
.......Open Monitor Indicator . 13, 77
..................................Turn Signals . 104
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 335
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 368
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 248
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 307
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 258
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 366
....Vehicle Identification Number . 364
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 281
........VSA System Indicator . 63, 281
...VSA Activation Indicator . 63, 281
.........................VSA Off Switch . 282
.............................Vehicle Storage . 333
.................................................VIN . 364
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 305
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55
....................Warranty Coverages . 379
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 310
...................................Operation . 102
Wheels
.............Adjusting the Steering . 111
............Alignment and Balance . 327
..........................Compact Spare . 336
...............................Nut Wrench . 338
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 146
................Operating the Power . 145
.........................Rear, Defogger . 110
Windshield
.....................................Cleaning . 102
...................................Defroster . 165
.....................................Washers . 102
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 323
...................................Operation . 102
........Summer/Winter Position . 103
....................................Worn Tires . 326
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 360
Index
W
V
U
INDEX
IX
Main Menu
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:
SpareTirePressure:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Power Steering Fluid:
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Front:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement.
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
SH-AWD clutch case
Capacity:
SH-AWD differential case
0.77 US qt (0.73
)
310
305
311
19.4 US gal (73
)
312
2.8 US qt (2.7
)
Main Menu
Main Menu
